Contents

Canon Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn Basic Operation Guide PDF

1 of 548
1 of 548

Summary of Content for Canon Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn Basic Operation Guide PDF

Basic Operation Guide

Please read this guide before operating this product. After you nish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference.

Before Using the Machine

Originals and Print Media

Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Copying

Fax

E-mail

Printing

Scanning

Network

Setting from a PC

Maintenance

Troubleshooting

Machine Settings

Appendix

M anuals for the M

achine

Manuals for the Machine

Manuals for the Machine The manuals for this machine are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.

Considerable effort has been made to make sure that the manuals for the machine are free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our products, if you need an exact specification, please contact Canon. The machine illustration on the cover may differ slightly from your machine.

Read this manual first.

Starter Guide What you can do with the machine Machine setup Connection and settings before using the machine Connecting the machine to a network Software installation

Read this manual to learn the required settings and connections before using the machine.

Read this manual next.

Basic Operation Guide Safety instructions Registering destinations in the Address Book Copy Fax E-mail Specifications

Read this manual to learn information about basic operations and machine functions.

Read the sections of these manuals that correspond to your intended use.

e-Manual (Located on User Manual CD-ROM)

Advanced features Scan Network Remote user interface Security Troubleshooting

Read this manual to learn detailed information about advanced machine operations and functions, and how to customize machine settings.

This Document

O verview

of M achine Functions

Copying In addition to the Color and B/W

copying, you can use various copy functions.

Basic Operation Guide Copying (see on p. 4-1)

e-Manual Copying

Overview of Machine Functions Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, some functions may not be available.

Faxing In addition to the normal faxing, you

can send faxes from a computer and send I-faxes. Received fax documents can

be also forwarded to specified destinations such as a shared folder in a computer.

Basic Operation Guide Fax (see on p. 5-1)

e-Manual Fax

Printing In addition to the printing from a

computer, you can print a document directly from memory media.

Basic Operation Guide Printing (see on p. 7-1)

e-Manual Printing

Scanning You can store scanned documents in

a networked computer, send to a file server, or save directly to a USB memory.

Basic Operation Guide Scanning (see on p. 8-1)

e-Manual Scanning

O verview

of M achine Functions

Network This machine can be connected to a

network. Connecting to a network enables you to use various functions.

Basic Operation Guide Network (see on p. 9-1)

e-Manual Network Settings

Remote User Interface

You can set and manage this machine easily and quickly from a computer.

Basic Operation Guide Settings from a PC (see on p. 10-1)

e-Manual Setting from a PC

E-mail function

Scanned documents can be sent as e- mail file attachments.

Basic Operation Guide E-mail (see on p. 6-1)

e-Manual E-mail

Security function

You can limit the use of the machine by setting the IDs. You can also limit the use of some functions.

e-Manual Security

Contents

v

Contents

Manuals for the Machne ...................................... Overvew of Machne Functons .........................

Contents ................................................................. v How to Use Ths Gude ........................................ x

Symbols Used in This Manual ...............................ix Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual .............ix Abbreviations Used in This Manual ....................ix Illustrations Used in This Manual.........................ix

Important Safety Instructons ............................ x Installation ....................................................................x Power Supply .............................................................xi Handling ......................................................................xi Maintenance and Inspections .............................xii Consumables ........................................................... xiv Others ........................................................................ xiv Telephone Equipment ......................................... xiv

Installaton Requrements and Handlng .......xv Temperature and Humidity Conditions .......... xv Power Supply Requirements .............................. xv Installation Requirements ................................... xv Installation Space ................................................... xvi Maintenance and Inspections ........................... xvi Customer Support ................................................. xvi

Legal Notces ......................................................xv IPv6 Ready Logo .................................................... xvii Trademarks .............................................................. xvii Copyright ................................................................. xvii Third Party Software ............................................ xvii Disclaimers ............................................................. xviii About the Part Containing Mercury (Applicable Only to the USA) ........................... xviii For CA, USA only................................................... xviii Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images ...................... xviii FCC (Federal Communications Commission) ............................................................ xix Users in the U.S.A. .................................................. xix

Contents

Users in Canada ...................................................... xxi Utilisation au Canada .......................................... xxii

Laser Safety .......................................................xx CDRH Regulations ............................................... xxiii

1 Before Using the Machine ........... 1-1 Machne Components ...................................... 1-2

External View (Front) .............................................1-2 External View (Back) ..............................................1-4 Internal View ............................................................1-5

Control Panel ...................................................... 1-6 Main Control Panel ................................................1-6 Registering the Custom Keys .............................1-8 Left Side of Control Panel................................. 1-10 Right Side of Control Panel ............................. 1-10

Dsplay Parts and Functons .......................... 1-11 Main Menu Screen .............................................. 1-11 Copy Top Screen .................................................. 1-12 Send Type Selection Screen ............................ 1-13 Store Type Selection Screen ............................ 1-14 Select Memory Media Screen (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only) ....... 1-14 Log In Mode .......................................................... 1-14

Toner Cartrdges .............................................. 1-15 Maintaining the Toner Cartridges ................. 1-16 Checking the Toner Level ................................. 1-17

Checkng the Devce Informaton ................ 1-18 Enterng Characters ........................................ 1-19 Telephone Lne Settng .................................. 1-20 Tmer Settngs .................................................. 1-22

Setting the Sleep Mode .................................... 1-22 Setting Auto Clear Time .................................... 1-23 Setting the Daylight Saving Time ................. 1-24

2 Originals and Print Media ........... 2-1 Orgnals Requrements ................................... 2-2 Scannng Area .................................................... 2-3

Contents

v

Contents

Placng Orgnals ............................................... 2-4 On the Platen Glass ...............................................2-4 In the Feeder ............................................................2-5

Paper Requrements ......................................... 2-7 Prntable Area .................................................... 2-9 Loadng Paper .................................................. 2-10

In the Paper Drawer ........................................... 2-10 In the Stack Bypass Tray .................................... 2-16

Settng Paper Sze and Type .......................... 2-22 For the Stack Bypass Tray ................................. 2-22 Registering Irregular Paper Sizes for the Stack Bypass Tray ................................................ 2-26 For the Paper Drawer ......................................... 2-28

3 Registering Destinations in the Address Book .................................. 3-1

Storng/Edtng Address Book ........................ 3-2 Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book ...........................................................3-2 Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book ....................3-7 Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book ........................................................ 3-10 Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book .... 3-13 Registering I-Fax Addresses in the Address Book ........................................................ 3-16 Registering File Server Addresses in the Address Book ........................................................ 3-18 Registering Group Addresses in the Address Book ........................................................ 3-24 Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in the Address Book ........................................... 3-27 Erasing Addresses from the Address Book ........................................................ 3-30

Storng/Edtng One-Touch ........................... 3-32 Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch ..... 3-32 Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch .............................. 3-37 Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch ............................................................. 3-40

Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch.................. 3-43 Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-Touch ............................................................. 3-46 Registering File Server Addresses in One-Touch ............................................................. 3-49 Registering Group Addresses in One-Touch ............................................................. 3-55 Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in One-Touch ............................................................. 3-59 Erasing Addresses Registered in One-Touch ............................................................. 3-62

4 Copying ........................................ 4-1 Overvew of Copy Functons ........................... 4-2 Basc Copyng Method ..................................... 4-4 Cancelng Copy Jobs ......................................... 4-6 Selectng Color Mode ....................................... 4-7 Selectng Paper Source .................................... 4-9

Copying on Paper in Drawers ............................4-9 Using Stack Bypass Tray with Standard Paper Sizes ............................................................. 4-11 Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular Sizes of Paper........................................................ 4-13 Using Stack Bypass Tray with Envelopes .... 4-15 Recalling Irregular Paper Size Registered for the Stack Bypass Tray .................................. 4-17

Adjustng Densty............................................ 4-19 Adjusting Base Color ......................................... 4-21

2-Sded Copyng .............................................. 4-23 1 to 2-Sided Copying ......................................... 4-24 2 to 2-Sided Copying ......................................... 4-26 2 to 1-Sided Copying ......................................... 4-28

Enlarge/Reduce Images ................................. 4-31 Preset Zoom .......................................................... 4-31 Custom Copy Ratio ............................................. 4-33

Selectng Image Qualty................................. 4-35 Multple Orgnals onto One Sheet (N on 1) .............................................................. 4-37 Makng ID Card Copes ................................... 4-40 Adjustng Sharpness ....................................... 4-42

Contents

v

Contents

Erasng Shadows/Lnes .................................. 4-44 Original Frame Erase .......................................... 4-45 Book Frame Erase ................................................ 4-48 Binding Erase ........................................................ 4-51

Adjustng Color Balance ................................ 4-54 Registering Color Balance ................................ 4-56 Recalling Registered Color Balance .............. 4-58 Deleting Color Balance ..................................... 4-59

Collatng Copes .............................................. 4-60 Makng Multple Copes ................................. 4-62 Checkng Current Settngs ............................ 4-63 Frequently Used Settngs (Mode Memory) ............................................... 4-64

Registering Mode Memory ............................. 4-64 Recalling Mode Memory .................................. 4-66 Checking Mode Memory ................................. 4-67 Deleting Mode Memory ................................... 4-68

Changng Standard Mode ............................. 4-69 Intalzng Standard Mode ............................ 4-71 Checkng and Cancelng Copy Jobs/ Checkng Copy Logs ....................................... 4-72

Checking Copy Jobs........................................... 4-72 Canceling Copy Jobs ......................................... 4-73 Checking Copy Logs .......................................... 4-74

5 Fax ................................................. 5-1 Overvew of Fax Functons .............................. 5-2 Introducton to Usng Fax Functons ............. 5-4

Methods for Receiving Faxes .............................5-4 Selecting the Receive Mode ..............................5-9 Setting the Current Date and Time .............. 5-12 Setting the Type of Telephone Line .............. 5-13 Registering the Machines Name ................... 5-14 Registering Your Machines Fax Number .... 5-16

Sendng Fax Documents ................................ 5-17 Basic Methods for Sending Faxes .................. 5-17 Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual Sending) ....................... 5-19 Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing ....... 5-21 Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) ........................................................ 5-22

Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes ............... 5-25 Basic Methods for Sending PC Faxes ........... 5-27

Cancelng Sendng Fax Documents ............. 5-29 Specfyng Destnatons ................................. 5-30

Specifying a New Fax Number ....................... 5-30 Using the Address Book ................................... 5-34 Using the One-Touch ......................................... 5-36 Using the Group Addresses............................. 5-38 Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) ................................... 5-41 Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP Server ...................................................................... 5-43

Selectng Resoluton ....................................... 5-50 Adjustng Densty............................................ 5-51

Manual Exposure Adjustment ....................... 5-51 Adjusting Base Color ........................................ 5-52

Selectng Image Qualty................................. 5-54 2-Sded Orgnal ............................................... 5-56 Sendng Orgnals at a Preset Tme (Delayed Sendng) ........................................... 5-58 Drect Sendng ................................................. 5-61 Favortes ............................................................ 5-63

Registering Favorites ......................................... 5-63 Erasing Favorites ................................................. 5-67 Using the Favorites ............................................. 5-70 Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites ... 5-71

Job Recall .......................................................... 5-73 ECM Transmsson ........................................... 5-76 Adjustng the Pause Tme .............................. 5-78 Redalng Automatcally When the Lne Is Busy (Auto Redal) ....................................... 5-80 Checkng the Dal Tone before Sendng ..... 5-83 Standard Send Settngs ................................. 5-85

Storing the Standard Send Settings............. 5-85 Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default .................................................... 5-87

Prntng the TX Termnal ID ........................... 5-89 Adjustng Sharpness ....................................... 5-92 Specfyng What to Dsplay on the Screen for a Send Operaton ......................... 5-94

Contents

v

Contents

Restorng the Send Functon Settngs to Ther Default .................................................... 5-96 Send Start Speed ............................................. 5-98 Prntng Receved Documents on Both Sdes of Paper ................................................5-100 Reducng a Receved Document ................5-102 Prntng Footer Informaton on a Receved Document ......................................5-105 Specfyng the Way of Prntng When Toner Is Low ....................................................5-107 ECM Recepton ...............................................5-109 Settng the Incomng Rng Tone .................5-111 Recevng Documents Manually wth an External Telephone (Remote Recepton) ...5-113

Activating the Remote Reception...............5-113 Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception .............................................................5-114

Adjustng the Auto Swtch Tme for the Manual RX Mode ...........................................5-115 Rejectng Incomng Faxes from the Undentfed Senders ....................................5-117 Receve Start Speed ......................................5-119 Recevng Documents n Memory wthout Prntng Out (Memory Lock Recepton) ....5-121 Prntng All Documents Stored n the Memory Lock Recepton Mode ...................5-124 Forwardng Receved Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machne ....................5-126

Before Specifying the Forwarding Settings .................................................................5-127 Specifying Forwarding Settings ..................5-128 Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination .......................................5-140 Handling Forwarding Documents .............5-141 Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors .....................................................................5-143 Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors ...........5-144

Checkng/Changng the Status of Fax Documents n Memory.................................5-147

Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents ..........................................................5-147 Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents ..........................................................5-148 Checking/Printing the Fax Log ....................5-150

6 E-mail ............................................ 6-1 Overvew of E-Mal Functons ......................... 6-2 Introducton to Usng E-Mal Functons ........ 6-4 Basc E-Mal Operatons ................................... 6-5

Sending E-Mail Documents................................6-5 Canceling Sending E-Mail Documents ..........6-7

7 Printing ......................................... 7-1 Overvew of Prnt Functons ............................ 7-2 Introducton to Usng Prnt Functons .......... 7-4 Prntng Documents from Computer ............. 7-6 Scalng Documents ........................................... 7-8 Prntng Multple Pages on One Sheet ........ 7-10 2-Sded Prntng ............................................... 7-11 Prntng from Memory Meda (Drect Prnt) ..................................................... 7-12

Memory Media Supported by This Machine .................................................................. 7-12 Data Supported by This Machine .................. 7-13 Inserting Memory Media ................................. 7-14 Removing Memory Media ............................... 7-15 Printing from Memory Media ......................... 7-15

Checkng and Cancelng Prnt Jobs/ Checkng Prnt Logs ........................................ 7-27

Checking Print Jobs ........................................... 7-27 Canceling Print Jobs .......................................... 7-28 Checking Print Logs ........................................... 7-29

8 Scanning ....................................... 8-1 Overvew of Scanner Functons...................... 8-2 Introducton to Usng Scanner Functons .... 8-4

For Scanning Documents to a Shared Folder (File Server) .................................................8-4 For Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer ..........................................8-4

Contents

v

Contents

Basc Scannng Operatons .............................. 8-6 Scanning Documents to a File Server.............8-6 Scanning Documents to a USB Memory .......8-8 Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer ............................................................... 8-10

9 Network ........................................ 9-1 Flowchart for Settng Up Network ................. 9-2 What s the Network? ....................................... 9-3 Overvew of Network Functons ..................... 9-4

10 Settings from a PC ...................10-1 Overvew of Remote UI .................................. 10-2 Startng the Remote UI .................................. 10-4

11 Maintenance ............................11-1 Cleanng the Machne .................................... 11-2

Exterior ................................................................... 11-2 Interior .................................................................... 11-3 Scanning Area ...................................................... 11-4

Replacng the Toner Cartrdges .................... 11-7 When a Message Appears ............................... 11-7 Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One ................................................................ 11-8

Recyclng Used Cartrdges ...........................11-13 The Clean Earth Campaign - The Canon Cartridge Return Program .............................11-13 U.S.A. PROGRAM ................................................11-14 Canadian Program Programme au Canada ..................................................................11-17

Transportng the Machne ...........................11-19

12 Troubleshooting ......................12-1 Clearng Jams ................................................... 12-2

Original Jams ........................................................ 12-3 Paper Delivery Tray ............................................. 12-5 Duplex Unit ........................................................... 12-6 Stack Bypass Tray ................................................ 12-8 Paper Drawer 1 ..................................................12-10 Optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) ................................................12-11

Inside of the Machine ......................................12-13 Fixing Unit ...........................................................12-16 Back Cover ...........................................................12-18

When the Message Does Not Dsappear ...12-19 If the Delvery Feeder Unt Is Not Installed Correctly .........................................12-22 Error Messages...............................................12-24 Error Codes .....................................................12-34 If a Message Such as set sze/type.> s dsplayed .........................12-41

Reloading the Paper ........................................12-42 Changing the Paper Size Setting.................12-42

If a Power Falure Occurs ..............................12-45 If You Cannot Solve a Problem ....................12-46

Customer Support (U.S.A.) .............................12-46 Customer Support (Canada) .........................12-46

13 Machine Settings .....................13-1 Machne Settngs ............................................. 13-2

Printing USERS DATA LIST ............................... 13-2 Accessing the Setting Menu ........................... 13-3

Settng Menu ................................................... 13-5 Paper Settings ...................................................... 13-5 Volume Settings .................................................. 13-6 Common Settings ............................................... 13-6 Communications Settings ............................... 13-8 Address Book Settings ....................................13-10 Printer Settings ..................................................13-13 Timer Settings ....................................................13-18 Adjustment/Cleaning ......................................13-19 Report Settings ..................................................13-20 System Management Settings .....................13-21

14 Appendix ..................................14-1 Specfcatons ................................................... 14-2 Index .................................................................. 14-7

H ow

to U se This G

uide

x

How to Use This Guide

Symbols Used in This Manual The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.

Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings.

Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.

Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly recommended.

Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully, and make sure not to perform the described operations.

Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be pressed are expressed in this manual.

Operation Panel Keys: + (Key name) Example: (Stop). Buttons on the computer operation screen: [Button name] Example: [OK] Information in the display appears in angle brackets: .

Abbreviations Used in This Manual

In this Manual, operating systems are abbreviated as follows. Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system: Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows XP operating system: Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista operating system: Windows Vista Microsoft Windows 7 operating system: Windows 7 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 operating system: Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 operating system: Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Windows operating system: Windows

Illustrations Used in This Manual

Unless otherwise mentioned, illustrations used in this manual are those taken when no optional equipment is attached to the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn. When there is any difference between Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn and Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, it is clearly indicated in the text, for instance Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only.

How to Use This Guide

Im portant Safety Instructions

x

Important Safety Instructions

Important Safety Instructions

Installation

Do not install the machine in a location near alcohol, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. Do not place the following items on the machine. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn off the power switches of the machine and computer (1) and disconnect the interface cable if it is connected (2). Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet (3) and contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Necklaces and other metal objects Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with water or liquids

When installing and removing the optional accessories, be sure to turn the machine off , unplug the power plug, and then disconnect all the interface cables and power cord from the machine. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

Do not install the machine in unstable locations, such as on unsteady platforms or inclined floors, or in locations subject to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the machine to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury. The ventilation slots are provided for proper ventilation of working parts inside the machine. Never place the machine on a soft surface, such as a bed, sofa, or rug. Blocking the slots can cause the machine to overheat, resulting in a fire. Do not install the machine in the following locations, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

A damp or dusty location A location exposed to smoke and steam, such as near a cookery or humidifier A location exposed to rain or snow A location near a water faucet or water A location exposed to direct sunlight A location subject to high temperatures A location near open flames

When installing the machine, gently lower the machine to the installation site so as not to catch your hands between the machine and the floor or between the machine and other equipment, as this may result in personal injury.

Please read these Important Safety Instructions thoroughly before operating the machine. As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user and other persons or destruction of property, always pay attention to these instructions and operational requirements. Also, as it may result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation unless otherwise specified in the manual.

Im portant Safety Instructions

x

Important Safety Instructions

When connecting the interface cable, connect it properly by following the instructions in this manual. If not connected properly, this may result in malfunction or electrical shock. When installing the machine with casters, always lock the casters. Otherwise, the machine may move or tip over, resulting in personal injury. When moving the machine, follow the instructions in this manual to hold it correctly. Failure to do so may cause you to drop the machine, resulting in personal injury. (See Transporting the Machine, on p. 11-19.)

Power Supply

Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the power cord or pull on or excessively bend it. This can cause electrical damage, resulting in fire or electrical shock. Keep the power cord away from all heat sources. Failure to do so can cause the power cord insulation to melt, resulting in a fire or electrical shock. The power cord should not be taut, as this may lead to a loose connection and cause overheating, which could result in a fire. The power cord may become damaged if it is stepped on, fixed with staples, or if heavy objects are placed on it. Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead to an accident, such as a fire or electrical shock. Do not plug or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this can result in electrical shock. Do not plug the power cord into a multiplug power strip, as this can result in a fire or electrical shock. Do not bundle up or tie up the power cord in a knot, as this can result in a fire or electrical shock. Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet. Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock. If excessive stress is applied to the connection part of the power cord, it may damage the power cord or the wires inside the machine may disconnect. This could result in a fire. Avoid the following situations:

Connecting and disconnecting the power cord frequently. Tripping over the power cord. The power cord is bent near the connection part, and continuous stress is being applied to the power outlet or the connection part. Applying a shock to the power connector.

Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as this can result in a fire or electrical shock. As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a fire or electrical shock. Remove the power plug from the AC power outlet and refrain from using the machine while it thunders. Lightening can result in a fire, electrical shock or malfunction.

Do not use a power supply voltage other than that listed herein, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock. Always grasp the power plug when unplugging the power plug. Do not pull on the power cord, as this may expose the core wire of the power cord or damage the cord insulation, causing electricity to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical shock. Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If objects are placed around the power plug, you may be unable to unplug it in an emergency.

Handling

Do not disassemble or modify the machine. There are high-temperature and high-voltage components inside the machine which may result in a fire or electrical shock. Electrical equipment can be hazardous if not used properly. Do not allow children to touch the power cord, cables, internal gears, or electrical parts. If the machine makes an unusual noise or emits smoke, heat, or an unusual smell, immediately turn off the power switches of the machine and computer and disconnect the interface cable if it is connected. Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Continued use can result in a fire or electrical shock. Do not use flammable sprays near the machine. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. Always turn off the power switches of the machine and computer, and then unplug the power plug and interface cables before moving the machine. Failure to do so can damage the cables or cords, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.

Im portant Safety Instructions

x

Important Safety Instructions

Confirm that the power plug or power connecter is inserted completely after moving the machine. Failure to do so can result in an overheating and fire. Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects inside the machine. Also, do not spill water, liquids, or other flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, etc.) inside the machine. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn off the power switches of the machine and computer and disconnect the interface cable if it is connected. Then, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not touch the metal part of the connector, as this can result in electrical shock.

Do not place heavy objects on the machine. The object or the machine may fall, resulting in personal injury. Turn off the power switch when the machine will not be used for a long period of time, such as overnight. Turn off the machine and unplug the power plug if the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, such as for several days. Open or close covers and install or remove cassettes gently and carefully. Be careful not to hurt your fingers. Keep your hands and clothing away from the roller in the output area. Even if the machine is not printing, the roller may suddenly rotate and catch your hands or clothing, resulting in personal injury. The output slot is hot during and immediately after printing. Do not touch the area surrounding the output slot, as this may result in burns. Printed paper may be hot immediately after being output. Be careful when removing the paper and aligning the removed paper, especially after continuous printing. Failure to do so may result in burns. When performing copy with a thick book placed on the platen glass, do not press the feeder forcefully. This may damage the platen glass and cause personal injury. Be careful not to drop a heavy object, such as a dictionary, on the platen glass. This may damage the platen glass and cause personal injury.

Close the feeder gently so as not to catch your hand. This may result in personal injury. The laser beam can be harmful to human bodies. The laser beam is confined in the laser scanner unit by a cover, so there is no danger of the laser beam escaping during normal machine operation. Read the following remarks and instructions for safety.

Never open covers other than those indicated in this manual. Do not remove the caution label attached to the cover of the laser scanner unit.

If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes, exposure may cause damage to your eyes.

If you operate this machine in manners other than the control, adjustment, and operating procedures prescribed in this manual, this may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Maintenance and Inspections

When cleaning the machine, turn off the machine and computer, and unplug the interface cables and power plug. Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock. Unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet periodically and clean the area around the base of the power plugs metal pins and the AC power outlet with a dry cloth to remove all dust and grime. In damp, dusty, or smoky locations, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp, which can cause a short circuit, resulting in a fire.

Im portant Safety Instructions

x

Important Safety Instructions

Clean the machine with a well wrung out cloth dampened with water or mild detergent diluted with water. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. Some areas inside the machine are subject to high voltage. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting inside of the machine, be careful not to allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this can result in burns or electrical shock. Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames. This may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or fire. Confirm that the power plug or power connecter is inserted completely after cleaning the machine. Failure to do so can result in an overheating and fire. Check the power cord and plug regularly. The following conditions may result in fire, so please contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

There are burn marks on the power plug. The blade on the power plug is deformed or broken. The power is turned OFF or ON when bending the power cord. The coating of the power cord is damaged, cracked, or dented. A part of the power cord becomes hot.

Check regularly that the power cord and plug are not handled in the following manner. Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock.

The power connector is loosened. Stress is being applied to the power cord by a heavy object or by fixing it with staples. The power plug is loosened. The power cord is tied in a bundle. A part of the power cord is put in an aisle. The power cord is put in front of the heating appliance.

The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine become hot during use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns.

When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not expose yourself to the heat emitted from the fixing unit and its surroundings for a prolonged period of time. Doing so may result in low temperature burns, even though you did not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings directly. If paper is jammed, remove the jammed paper so that any pieces of paper do not remain inside the machine according to the displayed message. Also, do not put your hand in an area other than indicated areas, as this may result in personal injuries or burns. When removing jammed paper or replacing a toner cartridge, be careful not to get any toner on your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water sets the toner, making it impossible to remove the toner stains.

Im portant Safety Instructions

xv

Important Safety Instructions

When removing jammed paper, be careful not to allow the toner on the paper to scatter. The toner may get into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician. When loading paper or removing jammed documents or paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper. When removing a toner cartridge, remove the toner cartridge carefully so as to prevent the toner from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician. Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge. The toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician. If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, be careful not to inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct contact with your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin, wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale the toner, consult a physician immediately.

Consumables

Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames. This may cause the toner to ignite, resulting in burns or fire. Do not store toner cartridges or paper in a location exposed to open flames. This may cause the toner or paper to ignite, resulting in burns or fire. When disposing of a toner cartridge, place the toner cartridge into a bag to prevent the toner from scattering, and then dispose of the toner cartridge according to local regulations.

Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If the toner or other parts are ingested, consult a physician immediately. Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge. The toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician.

If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, be careful not to inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct contact with your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin, wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale the toner, consult a physician immediately. Do not pull out the sealing tape forcefully or stop at midpoint, as this may cause toner to spill out. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician.

Others

If you are using a cardiac pacemaker This machine generates a low level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away from this machine and consult your physician immediately.

Telephone Equipment When using telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:

1. Do not use this machine near water (i.e., near a bathtub, kitchen sink, or laundry tub), or in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.

2. Avoid using the telephone during an electrical storm, as there may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

3. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

Installation Requirem ents and H

andling

xv

Installation Requirements and Handling

Installation Requirements and Handling

Temperature and Humidity Conditions

Temperature range: 50 F to 86 F (10 C to 30 C) Humidity range: 20 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)

Protecting the machine from condensation To prevent condensation from forming inside the machine in the following cases, let the machine adjust to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least two hours before use.

When the room where the machine is installed is heated rapidly When the machine is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location

If water droplets (condensation) form inside the machine, this can result in paper jams or poor print quality.

When using an ultrasonic humidifier When you are using an ultrasonic humidifier, it is therefore recommended that you use purified water or other water that is free of impurities. If you use tap water or well water, impurities in the water will be dispersed through the air. This can be trapped inside the machine, causing degradation in print quality.

Power Supply Requirements 120 V to 127 V 60 Hz

Precautions when connecting the power cord Do not connect this machine to an uninterruptible power source. Use an AC power outlet exclusively for the machine. Do not use the other sockets of the AC power outlet.

Do not plug the power plug into the auxiliary outlet on a computer. Do not use the same AC power outlet for both the machine and any of the following equipment.

Copy machine Air conditioner Shredder Equipment that consumes a large amount of electricity Equipment that generates electrical noise

When unplugging the power cord, keep interval of 10 seconds or more before plugging it again.

Miscellaneous precautions The maximum power consumption of the machine is as follows. Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn/MF9220Cdn: Less than 1300 W, 1350 W (with optional equipment) Electrical noise or a dramatic drop in mains voltage may cause the machine or computer to operate incorrectly or lose data.

Installation Requirements A location with sufficient space A location with good ventilation A location with a flat, even surface A location able to fully support the weight of the machine

Do not install the machine in the following locations, as this may result in damage to the machine.

A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or humidity A location subject to condensation

In order to use this machine in a safe and trouble-free manner, install the machine in a place that fulfills the following conditions. Also, read the remarks carefully.

Installation Requirem ents and H

andling

xv

Installation Requirements and Handling

A poorly ventilated location (If you use the machine for a long time or to perform a large amount of printing in a poorly ventilated room, the ozone or other odors generated by the machine may create an uncomfortable working environment. In addition, chemical particles are dispersed during printing; therefore, it is important to provide adequate ventilation.) A location near equipment that generates magnetic or electromagnetic waves A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur A location exposed to salt air, corrosive gases, or toxic gases A location, such as on a carpet or mat, that may warp from the weight of the machine or where the machine is liable to sink

Installation Space Required installation space

Maintenance and Inspections

Follow the instructions in the caution label attached to this machine. Avoid shaking or applying a shock to this machine. To prevent the paper jam, do not turn the power ON/ OFF, open/close the operation panel or rear cover, and load/unload paper in the middle of printing operation. Be sure to remove the toner cartridge from the machine when transporting the machine. To avoid exposing the toner cartridge to light, place it in the protective bag included with this machine or wrap it in a thick cloth. Clean this machine regularly. If this machine becomes dusty, it may operate improperly. Use a modular cable of 118 1/8" (3 m) or shorter in length.

The communication may become unavailable depending on the condition of local environment. In this case, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line. The repairing parts and toner cartridges for the machine will be available for at least seven (7) years after production of this machine model has been discontinued.

Customer Support Customer Support (U.S.A.) Your machine is designed with the latest technology to provide trouble-free operation. If you encounter a problem with the machines operation, try to solve it by using the information in Chapter 12. If you cannot solve the problem or if you think your machine needs servicing, contact Canon Customer Care Center at 1-800-OK-CANON between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. ET Monday through Friday. On-line support for 24 hours is also available at the website. http://www.canontechsupport.com/ Customer Support (Canada) Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support options*:

For e-mail support, the latest driver or document downloads, and answers to frequently asked questions, visit http://www.canon.ca/ Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. ET Monday through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still under warranty 1-800-652-2666 If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair options are available at the time of your call to the live technical support number above or via the website at http://www.canon.ca/

* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.

Legal N otices

xv

Legal Notices

As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Canon U.S.A., Inc. has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR Program for energy efficiency.

The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an international program that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment.

The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily.

The targeted products are office equipment, such as computers, displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. The standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.

IPv6 Ready Logo The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1 established by the IPv6 Forum.

Trademarks Canon, the Canon logo, and Color imageCLASS are registered trademarks of Canon Inc. in the United States and may also be trademarks or registered trademarks in other countries. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server and Windows Vista are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.

Copyright Copyright 2010 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.

UFST: Copyright 1989-2003 Monotype Imaging, Inc.

Third Party Software A. This Canon product (the PRODUCT) includes third- party software modules. Use and distribution of these software modules (the SOFTWARE) are subject to the conditions below.

(1) You agree that you will comply with any applicable export control laws, restrictions or regulations of the countries involved in the event that this product including the SOFTWARE is shipped, transferred or exported into any country.

(2) Rights holders of the SOFTWARE retain in all respects the title, ownership and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE. Except as expressly provided herein, no license or right, expressed or implied, is hereby conveyed or granted by rights holders of the SOFTWARE to you for any intellectual property of rights holders of the SOFTWARE.

(3) You may use the SOFTWARE solely for use with the PRODUCT.

(4) You may not assign, sublicense, market, distribute, or transfer the SOFTWARE to any third party without prior written consent of rights holders of the SOFTWARE.

(5) Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may transfer the SOFTWARE only when (a) you assign to a transferee all of your rights to the PRODUCT and all rights and obligations under the conditions governing the SOFTWARE and PRODUCT and (b) such transferee agrees in writing to be bound by all these conditions.

Legal Notices

Legal N otices

xv

Legal Notices

(6) You may not decrypt, decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble or otherwise reduce the code of the SOFTWARE to human readable form.

(7) You may not modify, adapt, translate, rent, lease or loan the SOFTWARE or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE.

(8) You are not entitled to remove or make separate copies of the SOFTWARE from the PRODUCT.

(9) The human-readable portion (the source code) of the SOFTWARE is not licensed to you.

ACCEPTANCE

THE TERMS OF THIS THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE STATED HERE OR IN RELATED WARRANTY PROVISIONS SHALL BE DEEMED ACCEPTED UPON YOUR USE OF THE PRODUCT FOR ONE OR MORE OF ITS NORMAL PURPOSES, IF THERE HAS BEEN NO OTHER PRIOR EXPRESS ACCEPTANCE.

THE TERMS OF THIS THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE GOVERN THE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE AS DELIVERED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ALL UPDATED VERSIONS OF THE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE PROVIDED UNDER MAINTENANCE AGREEMENTS OR OTHER SERVICE ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE PRODUCT WITH CANON USA OR CANON CANADA OR THEIR RESPECTIVE AUTHORIZED SERVICE ORGANIZATIONS.

Disclaimers The information in this document is subject to change without notice. CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.

About the Part Containing Mercury (Applicable Only to the USA)

LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS.

For CA, USA only Included battery contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.

Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.

Paper Money Travelers Checks

Money Orders Food Stamps

Certificates of Deposit Passports

Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)

Immigration Papers

Identifying Badges or Insignias

Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)

Selective Service or Draft Papers

Bonds or Other Certificates of Indebtedness

Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Agencies

Stock Certificates

Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title

Copyrighted Works/ Works of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner

Legal N otices

xx

Legal Notices

FCC (Federal Communications Commission) Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn/MF9220Cdn: F151100

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,

and

(2) this device must accept an interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Use of shielded cable is required to comply with class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in this manual. If you make such changes or modifications, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.

Canon U.S.A., Inc. One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A. TEL No. 1-800-OK-CANON

Users in the U.S.A. Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment

A. Location

Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See Chapter 14, Appendix, for specific dimensions and weight.

B. Order Information

1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be used.

2. Order an RJ11-C telephone wall jack (USOC), which should be installed by the telephone company. If the RJ11-C wall jack is not present, telephone/facsimile operation is not possible.

3. Order a normal business line from your telephone companys business representative. The line should be a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one line per unit.

DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line

-or-

IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas

Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) unit without Call Waiting can be used with your facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send nonstandard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a facsimile error.

C. Power Requirements

The machine should be connected to a standard 120 volt AC, three-wire grounded outlet only.

Do not connect this machine to an outlet or power line shared with other appliances that cause electrical noise. Air conditioners, electric typewriters, copiers, and machines of this sort generate electrical noise that often interferes with communications equipment and the sending and receiving of documents.

Legal N otices

xx

Legal Notices

Connection of the Equipment

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear panel of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format of US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.

The REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 10 is a REN of 1.0).

An FCC compliant telephone line cable and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premise wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant.

This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party lines is subjected to state tariffs.

In Case of Equipment Malfunction

Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the procedures described in this guide or the e-Manual, disconnect the equipment from the telephone line cable and disconnect the power cord. The telephone line cable should not be reconnected or the main power switch turned ON until the problem is completely resolved. Users should contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities for servicing of equipment, Information regarding Authorized Service Facility locations can be obtained by calling Canon Customer Care Center (1-800-OK-CANON).

Rights of the Telephone Company

If this equipment (Color imageCLASS M9280Cdn/ MF9220Cdn) causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service. The telephone company also retains the right to make changes in facilities and services that may affect the operation of this equipment. When such changes are necessary, the telephone company is required to give adequate prior notice to the user. However, if advance notice is not possible, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, the customer will be advised of his/her right to file a complaint with the FCC if he/she believes it is necessary.

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)

In order to program this information into your machine, you should complete the procedure for registering your name, units telephone number, time, and date in the Starter Guide.

Legal N otices

xx

Legal Notices

Users in Canada Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment

A. Location

Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See Chapter 14, Appendix, for specific dimensions and weight.

B. Order Information

1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be used.

2. Order a CA11A modular jack, which should be installed by the telephone company. If the CA11A jack is not present, installation cannot occur.

3. Order a normal business line from your telephone companys business representative. The line should be a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one line per unit.

DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line

-or-

IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas

Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) unit without Call Waiting can be used with your facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended because they send nonstandard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a facsimile error.

C. Power Requirements

The power outlet should be a three-prong grounded receptacle (Single or Duplex). It should be independent from copiers, heaters, air conditioners, or any electric equipment that is thermostatically controlled. The rated value is 115 volts and 15 amperes. The CA11A modular jack should be relatively close to the power outlet to facilitate installation.

Notice

This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.

The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.

The REN of this product is 1.0.

Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the companys inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent deterioration of service in some situations.

Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.

Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.

Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.

This equipment complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B limits.

Legal N otices

xx

Legal Notices

Utilisation au Canada Conditions Remplir Pralablement Linstallation dun Tlcopieur Canon

A. Emplacement

Prvoir une table, un meuble, ou un bureau suffisamment solide et de taille approprie (voir le chapitre 14, Annexe (Appendix), pour les indications de poids et dimensions).

B. Installation tlphonique

1. Une seule ligne tlphonique (tonalits ou impulsions) doit tre utilise.

2. Il faut commander un jack modulaire CA11A qui sera install par la compagnie tlphonique. Sans ce jack, la mise en place serait impossible.

3. Si vous vous abonnez une nouvelle ligne, demandez une ligne daffaires normale de qualit tlphonique courante ou quivalente. Prenez un abonnement dune ligne par appareil.

Ligne automatique interurbaine

ou

Ligne automatique internationale (si vous communiquez avec les pays trangers)

Canon vous conseille dutiliser une ligne individuelle conforme aux normes industrielles, savoir: ligne tlphonique 2,500 (pour appareil clavier) ou 500 (pour appareil cadran/impulsions). Il est galement possible de raccorder ce tlcopieur un systme tlphonique poussoirs car la plupart de ces systmes mettent des signaux dappel non normaliss ou des codes spciaux qui risquent de perturber le fonctionnement du tlcopieur.

C. Condition dalimentation

Raccordez le tlcopieur une prise de courant plus terre trois branches, du type simple ou double, et qui ne sert pas alimenter un copieur, un appareil de chauffage, un climatiseur ou tout autre appareil lectrique thermostat.

Lalimentation doit tre de 115 volts et 15 ampres. Pour faciliter linstallation, le jack CA11A doit tre assez proche de la prise de courant.

Remarques

Le prsent matriel est conforme aux spcifications techniques applicables dIndustrie Canada.

Avant dinstaller cet appareil, lutilisateur doit sassurer quil est permis de le connecter lquipement de la compagnie de tlcommunication locale et doit installer cet appareil en utilisant une mthode de connexion autorise. Il se peut quil faille tendre la circuiterie intrieure de la ligne individuelle dabonn, qui a t installe par la compagnie, au moyen dun jeu de connecteurs homologus (rallonge tlphonique).

Lattention de lutilisateur est attire sur le fait que le respect des conditions mentionnes ci-dessus ne constitue pas une garantie contre les dgradations de qualit du service dans certaines circonstances.

Lindice dquivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent tre raccords une interface tlphonique. La terminaison dune interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, la seule condition que la somme dindices dquivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs nexcde pas 5.

Le nombre dquivalents sonnerie (REN) de ce produit est 1,0.

Les rparations sur un appareil certifi doivent tre faites par une socit dentretien canadienne autorise par le Gouvernement canadien et dsigne par le fournisseur. Toute rparation ou modification que pourrait faire Iutilisateur de cet appareil, ou tout mauvais fonctionnement, donne la compagnie de tlcommunication le droit de dbrancher Iappareil.

Pour sa propre protection, Iutilisateur doit sassurer que les prises de terre de Iappareil dalimentation, les lignes tlphoniques et les tuyaux mtalliques internes, sil y en a, sont bien connects entre eux. Cette prcaution est particulirement importante dans les zones rurales.

Au lieu dessayer de faire ces branchements eux-mmes, les utilisateurs sont invits faire appel un service dinspection faisant autorit en matire dlectricit ou un lectricien, selon le cas.

Respecte les limites de la classe B de la NMB-003 du Canada.

Legal N otices

xx

Legal Notices

Laser Safety

This machine complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the machine does not produce hazardous radiation. Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.

CDRH Regulations

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.

Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

The label is attached to the laser scanner machine inside the machine and is not in a user access area.

Legal N otices

xxv

Legal Notices

Before U sing the M

achine

1-1

Machine Components .................................................1-2 External View (Front) ..........................................................1-2 External View (Back) ............................................................1-4 Internal View ..........................................................................1-5

Control Panel ...............................................................1-6 Main Control Panel ..............................................................1-6 Registering the Custom Keys ..........................................1-8 Left Side of Control Panel .............................................. 1-10 Right Side of Control Panel ........................................... 1-10

Display Parts and Functions .....................................1-11 Main Menu Screen ........................................................... 1-11 Copy Top Screen ................................................................ 1-12 Send Type Selection Screen .......................................... 1-13 Store Type Selection Screen.......................................... 1-14 Select Memory Media Screen (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only) ..................... 1-14 Log In Mode ........................................................................ 1-14

Toner Cartridges ........................................................1-15 Maintaining the Toner Cartridges ............................... 1-16 Checking the Toner Level............................................... 1-17

Checking the Device Information ............................1-18 Entering Characters ...................................................1-19 Telephone Line Setting .............................................1-20 Timer Settings ............................................................1-22

Setting the Sleep Mode .................................................. 1-22 Setting Auto Clear Time ................................................. 1-23 Setting the Daylight Saving Time ............................... 1-24

This chapter describes what you should know before using this machine, such as the names of the parts and their functions, and how to set up the machine to send/receive faxes.

Before Using the Machine 1Chapter

Before U sing the M

achine

1-2

Machine Components

Machine Components

This section describes the names and functions of all the parts on the outside and inside of the machine.

External View (Front)

Before U sing the M

achine

1-3

Machine Components

Feeder Originals placed in the Feeder are automatically fed sheet by sheet to the scanning area. The feeder also automatically turns over two-sided originals to make one- or two-sided copies.

Slide Guides Adjust the slide guides to match the width of the originals.

Original Supply Tray Originals placed here are automatically fed sheet by sheet to the scanning area of the platen glass. Place originals into this tray with the surface that you want to scan face up.

Original Output Tray Originals that have been scanned from the original supply tray are output to the original output tray in the order that they are fed into the feeder.

Original Stopper Prevents the originals from falling off the paper delivery tray. Open the stopper from its original position for LTR/A4 size paper. For LGL size paper, pull out the extension first, and then open the stopper.

Control Panel Machine controls.

Stack Bypass Tray Feeds non-standard size or thick/thin type paper stacks.

Stack Bypass Tray Extension Pull out to load paper stack.

Slide Guides for Stack Bypass Tray Adjusts to the width of the paper.

Paper Stopper Prevents the paper from falling off the paper delivery tray. Open the stopper from its original position for LTR/A4 size paper. For LGL size paper, pull out the extension first, and then open the stopper.

Paper Delivery Tray Copies, prints and faxes are output to the paper delivery tray.

Main Power Switch Press to the I side to turn the power ON.

USB Port Connect the USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable.

Ethernet Port Connect the network cable.

External Device Jack Connect an external device.

Telephone Line Jack Connect the external telephone cable.

Paper Drawer Holds up to 250 sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m2)).

Optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 Holds the additional paper supply. Up to 500 sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m2)) can be held.

Before U sing the M

achine

1-4

Machine Components

External View (Back)

Back Cover Open this cover to clear paper jams.

Power Socket Connect the power cord.

Before U sing the M

achine

1-5

Machine Components

Internal View

Scanning Area Originals placed in the feeder are scanned here.

Platen Glass Place originals here when scanning books, thick originals, thin originals, transparencies, etc.

Toner Cartridges When toner runs out, pull out the empty toner cartridges, and replace them with new ones.

Delivery Feeder Unit (Electrostatic Transfer Belt) Transfers toner to paper. Do not place any objects on or touch the transfer belt. Doing so deteriorates print quality.

Front Cover Open this cover to replace the toner cartridges or to clear paper jams.

Duplex Unit The duplex unit enables you to use the 2-Sided mode for copying or printing.

Fixing Unit The fixing unit fixes the toner to the paper. The parts inside the fixing unit are subject to high temperatures. When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this area.

Before U sing the M

achine

1-6

Control Panel

Control Panel

This section describes the names and functions of the keys on the control panel.

Main Control Panel

[Power] switch (Sub Power Supply) Press to turn the control panel ON or OFF. When the control panel is turned OFF, the machine is in the Sleep mode.

Numeric keys Use to enter alphanumeric characters.

[Clear] key Press to clear entered values or characters.

[Log In/Out] key Press to enter the Security mode.

Volume Control Dial Move to adjust the line volume.

[Stop] key Press to stop a job in progress, such as a scan or copy job.

Main Power Indicator Lights when the main power is turned ON.

Error Indicator Blinks or lights up if there is an error with the machine. When the Error indicator flashes, follow the instructions that appear on the display. When the Error indicator maintains a steady red light, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or Canon Customer Care Center.

[Start] key Press to start an operation.

Processing/Data Indicator Blinks or lights up green when the machine is performing operations. When the Processing/ Data indicator maintains a steady green light, a job is waiting or a document has been received in memory.

* The Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn is used for illustration purposes in this section.

Before U sing the M

achine

1-7

Control Panel

[Reset] key Press to restore the current settings to the Standard mode.

[OK] key Press to confirm the settings and proceed to the next screen.

Scroll Wheel Turn left and right to select menu items or setting items.

[], [], [], [] keys Press to move the cursor position.

[Back] key Press to return to the previous screen.

Any key Press to select the setting item displayed on the bottom of the display.

[Status Monitor/Cancel] key Press to display the System Monitor screen. The System Monitor screen enables you to check the status and log of Copy, Send, Fax, and Print jobs and cancel the ongoing jobs. The status of device or consumable can also be checked.

Display The settings screen for each function is shown on this display. Some settings screens may have several pages. (See Display Parts and Functions, on p. 1-11.)

Custom Key 2 You can assign the desired function for this key. For details, see Registering the Custom Keys on p. 1-8.

Custom Key 1 You can assign the desired function for this key. For details, see Registering the Custom Keys on p. 1-8.

[Main Menu] key Press to display the setting menu. Press to return to the Main Menu screen when you are on the mode screen.

Adjustng the Angle of the Control Panel

The angle of the control panel is adjustable in the range shown below.

Do not apply excess force to the control panel when adjusting its angle.

Before U sing the M

achine

1-8

Control Panel

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Registering the Custom Keys

You can assign frequently used functions to two custom keys located on the left of the display. The default settings are as follows:

: Copy : Send/Fax

After registering the custom keys, attach the supplied customize labels onto the control panel. If there is no label applicable to the function you register for the custom key, fill in the blank label and attach it. Size and form of the customize labels may vary depending on the countries or regions you purchased.

Before U sing the M

achine

1-9

Control Panel

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the function you want to assign, then press [OK].

You can select from , , , , , , ,

, , , , , , , and *1.

*1 Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.

7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Before U sing the M

achine

1-10

Control Panel

Left Side of Control Panel

Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn

Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn

SD/MS Card Slot Insert an SD/MS Card when using the Direct Print function.

CF Card Slot Insert a CF Card when using the Direct Print function.

When two different types of cards are inserted, the machine only recognizes the one that was inserted first.

Right Side of Control Panel

[Power] switch (Sub Power Supply)

USB Slot Insert a USB memory media device when scanning documents to it or printing image files stored in it (Direct Print)*. * The Direct Print function is available only for the

Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.

Volume Control Dial

Before U sing the M

achine

1-11

Display Parts and Functions

Display Parts and Functions

The settings screen for each function is shown on the display on the control panel. For details about each setting, refer to the pages on corresponding function. For instructions on how to display each screen, refer to Main Control Panel, on p. 1-6.

Depending on the number of destinations registered, after the main power switch is turned ON, you may not be able to perform operations using the control panel when the main menu screen appears. If this happens, wait until the machine responses to the key operations. Depending on your needs, you can change the main menu screen which appears when the main power switch is turned ON. For details, Setting the Initial Function, in the e-Manual. If the Auto Clear function is activated, the display returns to the main menu screen. Log in mode is displayed only when Department/User ID Management is set to in . For instructions, see Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual. A scroll bar displayed on the right side on the screen indicates that there are more items. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display the next screen. Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, some functions may not be available.

Main Menu Screen

Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn

Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn

Copy Displays the Copy Top screen. (See Copy Top Screen, on p. 1-12.)

Send/Fax Displays the Send Type Selection screen. (See Send Type Selection Screen, on p. 1-13.)

Scan to Store Displays the Store Type Selection screen. (See Store Type Selection Screen, on p. 1-14.)

Direct Print (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only) Displays the Select Memory Media screen. (See Select Memory Media Screen (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only), on p. 1-14.)

Additional Func. (Select with the right Any key) On the Additional Functions screen, you can adjust the machine settings to customize the way the machine works. (See Machine Settings, on p. 13-2.)

Device Info. (Select with the left Any key) On the Device Information screen, you can check the current machine status. (See Checking the Device Information, on p. 1-18.)

Before U sing the M

achine

1-12

Display Parts and Functions

Copy Top Screen

Selected item and its description Shows the highlighted item and its description.

Current Setting Lists the current settings.

Scroll Bar Indicates that more items can be viewed using [], [] or (Scroll Wheel).

Quantity Displays the copy quantity.

Paper Supply Displays the selected paper.

Copy Ratio Displays the copy ratio.

Color Mode Settings Sets the color mode (color or black and white).

Paper Source Settings Selects the paper source.

Density/Background Removal Settings Sets the density.

2-Sided Settings Sets 2-sided copying.

Preview Img. You can confirm the current standard settings. (See Checking Current Settings, on p. 4-63.)

Mode Memory (Select with the left Any key) You can store and recall frequently used copy settings and recall them. (See Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory), on p. 4-64.)

Copy Ratio Settings Enlarges or reduces the copy size.

Original Image Quality Settings Sets the image quality of the original.

N on 1 Settings Reduces the size of multiple originals to fit on one sheet of paper.

Sharpness Settings Sets the sharpness of the image.

Before U sing the M

achine

1-13

Display Parts and Functions

Frame Erase Settings Erases shadows and lines that appear when using various types of originals.

Color Balance Adjusts color balance depending on the color of the originals.

Collate Settings Sorts copies into sets arranged in page order.

ID Card Copy Copies the both sides of an ID card on one side of paper.

Copies Sets the number of copies.

Standard Settings Changes the Standard mode.

Back Select this item to return to the previous screen.

Send Type Selection Screen

Address Book Displays the Address Book screen. (See Chapter 3, Registering Destinations in the Address Book.)

Search LDAP Server Specify a fax number and an e-mail address via an LDAP server. (See Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP Server, on p. 5-43 and E-mail, in the e-Manual.)

New Fax Entry Enter a fax number using the numeric keys. (See Basic Methods for Sending Faxes, on p. 5-17.)

New E-mail Entry Displays the E-mail address entry screen. (See Sending E-Mail Documents, on p. 6-5.)

New I-Fax Entry Displays the I-Fax address entry screen. (See Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes, on p. 5-25.)

New File Server Entry Displays the file server address entry screen. (See Scanning Documents to a File Server, on p. 8-6.)

Specify from Log Select a destination from the last three destinations. (See Job Recall, on p. 5-73, E-mail, in the e-Manual, and Scan, in the e-Manual.)

Before U sing the M

achine

1-14

Display Parts and Functions

Back Select this item to return to the previous screen.

Store Type Selection Screen

Store on File Server Stores the scanned originals on the specified file server. (See Scanning Documents to a File Server, on p. 8-6.)

Store on Memory Media Stores the scanned originals in the memory media. (See Scanning Documents to a USB Memory, on p. 8-8.)

Remote Scan Enables to use the Network Scan function. (See Network Settings, in the e-Manual.)

Back Select this item to return to the previous screen.

Select Memory Media Screen (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Only)

For details about the Select Memory Media Screen, see Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print), on p. 7-12.

Insert a memory media, select a media, then press [OK].

Log In Mode

If the Department ID Management or User ID Management is set, the Log In screen is displayed. For information on the Department ID Management or User ID Management, see Security, in the e-Manual.

For Department ID Management

Enter the Department ID and password, then press (Log In/Out).

For User ID Management

Enter the User ID and password, then press (Log In/Out).

Make sure to press (Log In/Out) after using the machine when the Department ID/User ID Management is set.

Before U sing the M

achine

1-15

Toner Cartridge

Toner Cartridges

The lifetime of the Canon genuine toner cartridges used in this machine (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn/MF9220Cdn) is approximately 6000 pages for K (Black) and is approximately 6000 pages for each C (Cyan), M (Magenta) and Y (Yellow). The page counts are based on 5% coverage* when printing A4 size paper with the default print density setting. The level of toner consumption varies depending on the type of originals printed. If your average original contains a lot of graphics, tables, or charts, the life of the toner cartridge will be shorter as they consume more toner. When you are replacing a toner cartridge, be sure to use a toner cartridge designed for this product. To purchase the Canon genuine replacement toner cartridge, contact your local Canon dealer or Canon Customer Care Center (1-800-OK-CANON). * The term 5% coverage denotes a document on which the area covered with toner is 5%

of the total area of a sheet.

Model Name Supported Canon

Genuine Toner Cartridge Print Yield

Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn

Canon CRG111 Black Canon CRG111 Magenta Canon CRG111 Yellow Canon CRG111 Cyan

Approx. 6,000 pages

Before U sing the M

achine

1-16

Toner Cartridge

Maintaining the Toner Cartridges

Note the following when handling toner cartridges.

Do not place the toner cartridges in fire. Toner powder is flammable.

If there is a toner powder leakage, make sure not to inhale or touch the toner powder. If it comes in contact with your skin, rinse with cold water using soap. If you feel an irritation on your skin or inhale the powder, consult a doctor immediately. When removing the toner cartridges from the machine, make sure to remove them carefully. If not removed with care, the toner powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and mouth. If this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor immediately. Keep the toner cartridges away from small children. If they ingest the toner powder, consult a doctor immediately. Do not disassemble the toner cartridges. The toner powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and mouth. If this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor immediately.

Keep the toner cartridges away from computer screens, disk drives, and floppy disks. The magnets inside the toner cartridges may harm these items. Avoid locations subject to high temperature, high humidity, or rapid changes in temperature.

Storage temperature range: 32 to 95 F (0 to 35 C) Storage humidity range: 35 to 85 % RH (no condensation)

Do not expose the toner cartridges to direct sunlight or bright light for more than five minutes. Store the toner cartridges in their protective bags. Do not open the bags until you are ready to install the toner cartridges in the machine. Save the protective toner cartridge bags in case you need to repack and transport the toner cartridges at a later date. If the toner cartridge has to be removed from the machine for maintenance, place it in the protective bag that it came in or wrap it with a thick cloth immediately. Do not store the toner cartridges in a salty atmosphere or where there are corrosive gases such as from aerosol sprays. Do not remove the toner cartridges from the machine unnecessarily. Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner cartridges. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to light or is damaged. Always hold the toner cartridges by their handles to avoid touching the drum protective shutter.

Do not place the toner cartridges in an upright or an upside down position. If toner becomes caked in the toner cartridges, it may become impossible to free it even by shaking the toner cartridges. For optimum print quality, when you replace toner cartridges, using Canon genuine ones is recommended. [Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges] Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge. For more information, see http://www.canon.com/ counterfeit.

Before U sing the M

achine

1-17

Toner Cartridge

Checking the Toner Level

The Device Info. screen indicates one of three levels for the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges. If the message appears, it is recommended that the toner cartridges be replaced. (See Replacing the Toner Cartridges, on p. 11-7.)

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the left Any key to select .

The screen below indicates there is sufficient toner in the toner cartridge.

The screen below indicates that only a small amount of toner remaining inside the machine, You can continue printing. Proceed to step 4.

It is recommended that you purchase a new toner cartridge to have it available when needed.

The screen below indicates the toner cartridge is running out of toner.

3 Press the right Any key to select and follow the instructions on the display to replace the toner cartridge.

4 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Before U sing the M

achine

1-18

Checking the Device Information

Checking the Device Information

On the Device Information screen you can check the current machine status.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the left Any key to select .

Toner

The status of toner is displayed.

Available Memory

The remaining amount of available system memory is displayed in percentage.

Paper Information

The paper supply, and the paper type, paper size loaded in the paper drawer(s)* are displayed.

* The paper drawer 2 is displayed only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) is attached.

3 Press (Main Menu) return to the Main Menu screen. You can also return to the Main Menu screen by pressing [OK].

Before U sing the M

achine

1-19

Entering Characters

Entering Characters

For screens that require alphanumeric entries, follow the procedure below to enter characters.

Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to move the cursor position left or right.

Use [] and [] to move the cursor position up and down.

Press [OK] to enter the highlighted character or space and to determine the entry mode. Press [], [], [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to change the entry mode, then press [OK].

: Alphanumeric character entry mode : Symbol entry mode

Select by pressing the left Any key to clear the entered characters one by one.

Select by pressing the right Any key to complete the entry and return to the previous screen.

You can also use (numeric keys) to enter numbers.

Before U sing the M

achine

1-20

Telephone Line Setting

Telephone Line Setting

Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine. If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to send faxes. Be sure to check the type of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct setting. The default setting is .

Connect the telephone line cable before turning ON the machine, if you use the automatic detection mode.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Before U sing the M

achine

1-21

Telephone Line Setting

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine, then press [OK]. : Pulse dialing : Tone dialing Be sure to check the type of telephone line you are using and make the correct setting. If this setting is incorrect, you will not be able to communicate with other machines.

9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Before U sing the M

achine

1-22

Timer Settings

Timer Settings

Setting the Sleep Mode

When the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, it automatically enters the Sleep mode. The default settings are and <15 Minutes.>. We recommend that you use this option in the default setting.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the desired interval, then press [OK].

You can set the interval using (numeric keys).

Before U sing the M

achine

1-23

Timer Settings

Setting Auto Clear Time

If the machine remains idle for a certain period of time, the display returns to the standby mode (Auto Clear function). The default setting is <2 Minutes>.

If <0> is selected, the Auto Clear mode is not set. After the Auto Clear mode initiates, the display returns to the screen specified in in . For details, see Setting the Function after Auto Clear Mode Initiates, in the e-Manual.

7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

To enter the Sleep mode manually, press [Power] on the operation panel. The machine will not enter the Sleep mode when:

the machine is in operation the Processing/Data indicator is lit or flashing a message is on the display and the Error indicator is flashing there is a paper jam in the machine the handset of the external telephone is off the hook

The machine will leave the Sleep mode when: you press [Power] on the operation panel a fax is received the handset of the external telephone is off the hook a print job is sent from a computer, and the print is started (printing starts but the display remains off ) a computer performs a scan through the machine

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Before U sing the M

achine

1-24

Timer Settings

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Use [], [], (Scroll Wheel), or

numeric keys to set the desired interval , then press [OK].

You can set the interval from 0 (off ) to 9 minutes (in one-minute increments). You can also set the interval using (numeric keys).

6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Setting the Daylight Saving Time

In some countries or areas, time is advanced throughout the summer season. This is called Daylight Saving Time. The default setting is .

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Before U sing the M

achine

1-25

Timer Settings

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the month when the daylight saving time starts, then press [OK].

9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the week, then press [OK].

11 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Before U sing the M

achine

1-26

Timer Settings

12 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the day of the Week, then press [OK].

13 Press the right Any key to select .

The End Date Month to End DST screen appears.

14 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

15 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the month when the daylight saving time ends, then press [OK].

16 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

17 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the week, then press [OK].

18 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

19 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the day of the Week, then press [OK].

Before U sing the M

achine

1-27

Timer Settings

20 Press the right Any key to select .

21 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Before U sing the M

achine

1-28

Timer Settings

2-1

O

riginals and Print M edia

This chapter describes the types of paper and originals that can be used with the machine and how to load paper into the stack bypass tray.

Originals Requirements ..............................................2-2 Scanning Area ..............................................................2-3 Placing Originals ..........................................................2-4

On the Platen Glass .............................................................2-4 In the Feeder .........................................................................2-5

Paper Requirements ....................................................2-7 Printable Area ..............................................................2-9 Loading Paper ............................................................2-10

In the Paper Drawer ......................................................... 2-10 In the Stack Bypass Tray .................................................. 2-16

Setting Paper Size and Type .....................................2-22 For the Stack Bypass Tray ............................................... 2-22 Registering Irregular Paper Sizes for the Stack Bypass Tray .............................................................. 2-26 For the Paper Drawer ....................................................... 2-28

Originals and Print Media Chapter 2

2-2

Originals Requirements

O riginals and Print M

edia

Originals Requirements

Available original type, size, weight and quantity are shown in the table below.

Platen Glass Feeder

Type Sheet*1, book, three-dimensional objects Sheet

Size (W L) Max. 8 1/2" 14" (Max. 215.9 mm 355.6 mm)

Max. 14" 8.5" (355.6 mm 215.9 mm)*2

Min. 5" 5.5" (128 mm 139.7 mm)*2

Weight Max. 4.4 lb (2 kg) One-sided scanning (1 page): 13 to 34 lb (50 to 128 g/m2)*3

One-sided scanning (more than 2 pages): 13 to 28 lb (50 to 105 g/m2)*4

Two-sided scanning: 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g/m2)

Quantity 1 sheet Max. 50 sheets*5

(Max. 30 sheets for LGL originals)

*1 When copying transparent originals such as tracing paper or transparencies, use a piece of plain white paper to cover the

original after placing it face-down on the platen glass.

*2 When copying two-sided originals, only LTR, LGL, FLSC, A4 can be used.

*3 17 to 34 lb (64 to 128 g/m2) when copying originals smaller than LTR/A4.

*4 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g/m2) when copying originals smaller than LTR/A4.

*5 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper

Do not place the originals on the platen glass or in the feeder until the glue, ink or correction fluid on the originals are completely dry. Remove all fasteners (staples, paper clips, etc.) before loading the originals in the feeder. To prevent originals from jamming in the feeder, do not use any of the following:

Wrinkled or creased paper Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper Curled or rolled paper Coated paper Torn paper Onion skin or thin paper Paper printed with a thermal transfer printer Transparencies

2-3

Scanning Area O

riginals and Print M edia

Scanning Area

Make sure your originals' text and graphics fall within the shaded area in the following diagram. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.

Copy Scanning Area

Fax Scanning Area

2-4

Placing Originals

O riginals and Print M

edia

Placing Originals

Place your originals on the platen glass or into the feeder, depending on the size and type of the original, and the copy modes that you want to use.

On the Platen Glass

Place the originals on the platen glass when copying bound originals (such as books and magazines), heavy or lightweight originals, and transparencies.

1 Lift up the feeder.

2 Place your original face down.

3 Align the original with the appropriate paper size marks.

If your original does not match any of the paper size marks, align the center of your original with the arrow mark.

2-5

Placing Originals O

riginals and Print M edia

4 Gently close the feeder.

The original is ready for scanning.

Remove the original from the platen glass when scanning is complete.

In the Feeder

Place the originals into the feeder when you want to copy several originals at the same time, and press (Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals to the scanning area and scans them.

1 Fan the originals stack and even the edges. 2 Adjust the slide guides to the width of the

originals.

2-6

Placing Originals

O riginals and Print M

edia

3 Neatly place the originals face up in the original supply tray.

The originals are ready for scanning.

Do not add or remove originals while they are being scanned. When scanning is complete, remove the originals from the originals delivery tray to avoid paper jams. Avoid using feeder to scan the same originals more than 30 times. When scanned repeatedly, originals can become folded or torn, which may cause paper jams. If the feeder rollers are soiled from scanning originals written in pencil, clean them. (See Cleaning the Machine, on p. 11-2.)

2-7

Paper Requirements O

riginals and Print M edia

Paper Requirements

The paper size and types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table.

Paper drawer(s) Stack bypass tray

Size (W L) Legal*9, Letter*9, Oficio, M-Oficio, B-Oficio, Executive, Foolscap*9, A4*9, B5, A5

3" 5" to Legal (8 1/2" 14") (76.2 127 to 215.9 mm 355.6 mm) (Always set vertically.)

Weight 16 to 32 lb (60 to 120 g/m2) 16 to 47 lb (60 to 176 g/m2)

Quantity Max. 250 sheets *1 *8 Max. 100 sheets *1

Type Plain 1 *2*9

Plain 2 *3*9

Color *3*9

Recycled *3*9

Heavy 1 *4*9*10

Heavy 2 *5*11*12

Bond *6*9

Transparency *7

Labels

Envelopes

(: available : not available)

*1 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper

*2 From 16 to 19 lb (60 to 70 g/m2)

*3 From 17 to 28 lb (64 to 105 g/m2)

*4 From 28 to 32 lb (106 to 120 g/m2)

*5 From 32 to 47 lb (121 to 176 g/m2)

*6 From 20 to 28 lb (75 to 105 g/m2)

*7 Use only LTR or A4 size transparencies.

*8 Max. 500 sheets of paper can be set in the optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2).

*9 Can be used for two-sided copying.

*10 Select for the paper type when using the coated paper with the weight of 27 to 29 lb (100 to 110 g/m2). Load the

paper into the stack bypass tray sheet by sheet.

*11 Select for the paper type when using the coated paper with the weight of 32 to 35 lb (120 to 130 g/m2). Load the

paper into the stack bypass tray sheet by sheet.

*12 Select for the paper type when using the index cards with the weight of 32 to 47 lb (120 to 176 g/m2). Load the cards

into the stack bypass tray.

The default paper size is LTR. If you use a different paper size, you must change the paper size settings. (See Setting Paper Size and Type, on p. 2-22.)

2-8

Paper Requirements

O riginals and Print M

edia

To prevent paper jams, do not use any of the following: Wrinkled or creased paper Curled or rolled paper Torn paper Damp paper Very thin paper Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not copy on the reverse side.)

The following types of paper do not print well: Highly textured paper Very smooth paper Shiny paper

Make sure the paper is free from dust, lint, and oil stains. Be sure to test paper before purchasing large quantities. Store all paper wrapped and on a flat surface until ready for use. Keep opened packs in their original packaging in a cool, dry location. Store paper at 64.4F75.2F (18C24C), 40%60% relative humidity. Use only the transparencies designed for laser printers.

2-9

Printable Area O

riginals and Print M edia

Printable Area

The shaded area indicates the approximate printable area of LTR paper. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual use.

2-10

Loading Paper

O riginals and Print M

edia

Loading Paper

This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawers and stack bypass tray.

Handle paper carefully not to cut your hands with the edges of the paper. When installing or removing cassettes, be careful not to get your fingers caught.

In the Paper Drawer

This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawer or in the optional paper drawer.

1 Pull out the paper drawer until it stops.

2 Hold the paper drawer with both hands and remove it from the machine.

3 Hold the lock release lever of the side paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded. The side paper guides move together.

Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.

2-11

Loading Paper O

riginals and Print M edia

4 Hold the lock release lever of the rear paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded.

Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.

5 Fan the paper stack and even the edges.

6 Load the paper stack of the appropriate size with the print side facing up. Align the rear edge of the paper stack with the rear paper guide.

Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark (A).

The paper drawer holds approximately 250 sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m2)).

2-12

Loading Paper

O riginals and Print M

edia

7 Hold the paper drawer with both hands and set it back into the machine. 8 Push the paper drawer as far as it will go.

For details on loading paper in the stack bypass tray, see In the Stack Bypass Tray, on p. 2-16.

In the Optonal Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2)

When the optional drawer is installed in the machine, follow the procedure described below.

1 Pull out the optional paper drawer until it stops.

2 Hold the optional paper drawer with both hands and remove it from the machine.

3 Hold the lock release lever of the side paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded. The side paper guides move together.

Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.

2-13

Loading Paper O

riginals and Print M edia

4 Hold the lock release lever of the rear paper guides (A) and slide the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded.

Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause paper jams, dirty prints, etc.

5 Fan the paper stack and even the edges.

6 Load the paper stack of the appropriate size with the print side facing up. Align the rear edge of paper stack with the rear paper guide.

Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the load limit mark (A).

The optional paper drawer holds approximately 500 sheets of paper (20 lb (75 g/m2)).

7 Hold the optional paper drawer with both hands and set it back into the machine.

2-14

Loading Paper

O riginals and Print M

edia

8 Push the paper drawer as far as it will go.

For details on loading paper in the stack bypass tray, see In the Stack Bypass Tray, on p. 2-16.

2-15

Loading Paper O

riginals and Print M edia

When prntng paper wth a letterhead or logo (preprnted paper) usng the paper drawer:

Load the paper in the proper orientation as follows.

Portrait orientation Landscape orientation

1-sided printing (When in is set to (the default setting)) For details, see Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual.

(with the printing side facing up) (with the printing side facing up)

1-sided printing (When in is set to ) For details, see Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual.

(with the printing side facing down) (with the printing side facing down)

2-sided printing

(with the front side facing down) (with the front side facing down)

2-16

Loading Paper

O riginals and Print M

edia

In the Stack Bypass Tray

If you are making prints on transparencies, labels, nonstandard-sized paper, or envelopes, load them into the stack bypass tray.

Note the following points when using the stack bypass tray: Paper Quantity: one to approximately 100 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m2),) Paper Size: 3" 5" to 8 1/2" 14" (76.2 127 mm to 216 356 mm ) Paper Weight: 16 to 47 lb (60 to 176 g/m2) Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use, to allow the paper to feed smoothly through the stack bypass tray (allowable curl amount: less than 3/8" (10 mm) for normal paper, less than 1/4" (5 mm) for heavyweight paper). Depending on the paper storage conditions, it may not be possible to feed some paper into the stack bypass tray. In this case, set the amount of paper to less than 50 sheets 20 lb (75 g/m2).

Do not load different size/type paper at the same time. If you load multiple sheets of heavyweight paper into the stack bypass tray, a paper jam may occur depending on the type of heavyweight paper. If this happens, load only one sheet of heavyweight paper at a time. When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or transparencies, make sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could jam. If you are printing on envelopes, do not allow more than 10 envelopes to accumulate in the output tray. Always empty the output tray once 10 envelopes have accumulated. If you select for copying, you cannot use the 1-Sided to 2-Sided, 2-Sided to 2-Sided, N on 1, or ID Card Copy mode. (See Copy, in the e-Manual.) If you select , ,

, , for copying, you cannot use the 1-Sided to 2-Sided, 2-Sided to 2- Sided, N on 1, or ID Card Copy mode. (See Copy, in the e-Manual.) You cannot use when you print from a USB memory (Direct Print). (Only for the Color imageCLASS FM9280Cdn) Envelopes may be creased in the printing process. For high quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon. For more information on paper types that can be used with this machine, see Paper Requirements, on p. 2-7.

2-17

Loading Paper O

riginals and Print M edia

1 Open the stack bypass tray.

If the paper size you are going to load into the stack bypass tray is different from the paper size stored in stack bypass tray Standard Settings, set stack bypass tray Standard Settings to Off in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See Setting Paper Size and Type, on p. 2-22.)

2 Adjust the slide guides to match the size of the paper.

If you are feeding large size paper, pull out the auxiliary tray, and extend the tray extension.

3 Load the paper into the stack bypass tray. Insert the paper stack as far as it will go.

Before inserting paper

When you use the stack bypass tray to make copies, straighten out curled paper prior to use, as shown below. Curled paper may cause a paper jam.

If there is difficulty in straightening out curled paper, curl the front edges of the paper upward, as shown below.

2-18

Loading Paper

O riginals and Print M

edia

To print on the back side of preprinted paper

Load the preprinted paper face up into the stack bypass tray, as shown in the illustration below.

The screen for selecting the paper size appears.

When loading paper into the stack bypass tray, align the paper stack neatly between the slide guides. If the paper is not loaded correctly, a paper jam may occur. If you are printing on heavyweight paper or envelopes using the stack bypass tray, and find that the paper or envelopes are not being fed smoothly or evenly through the stack bypass tray, remove the paper or envelopes, curl the feeding edges upward approximately 1/8" (3 mm), and then reload the paper or envelopes. Curling the feeding edges enables the rollers to grip the paper or envelopes as they are fed into the machine from the stack bypass tray.

If there are instructions on the paper package about which side of the paper to load, follow those instructions. When the paper is loaded into the stack bypass tray, the side facing down is the one printed on. If problems, such as poor print quality or paper jams occur, try turning the paper stack over and reload it.

2-19

Loading Paper O

riginals and Print M edia

If you are loading envelopes into the stack bypass tray:

Take five envelopes, loosen them as shown, and then stack them together. Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes.

Place the envelopes on a clean, level surface, and press all the way around the envelopes by hand, in the direction of the arrows, to remove any curls. Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes.

Take particular care to spread the envelopes out in the direction that they will be fed.

Hold down the four corners of the envelopes firmly, so that they and the sealed or glued portion stay flat.

Do not print on the back side of the envelopes (the side with the flap). If the envelopes become filled with air, flatten them by hand before loading them into the stack bypass tray.

2-20

Loading Paper

O riginals and Print M

edia

Load the envelopes face down (flap side up) in the stack bypass so shown below.

For top opening envelopes, load them as their sealing side (flap side) is located on the left when viewed from the front.

For side opening envelopes, load them so their sealing side (flap side) is located in the back of the stack bypass tray when viewed from the front.

The screen for selecting the paper size appears.

The stack bypass tray can hold 10 envelopes at a time. Envelopes may be creased in the printing process.

2-21

Loading Paper O

riginals and Print M edia

When prntng paper wth a letterhead or logo (preprnted paper) usng the stack bypass tray:

Load the paper in the proper orientation as follows.

Portrait orientation Landscape orientation

1-sided printing (When in is set to (the default setting)) For details, see Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual.

(with the printing side facing down) (with the printing side facing down)

1-sided printing (When in is set to ) For details, see Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual.

(with the printing side facing up) (with the printing side facing up)

2-sided printing

(with the front side facing up) (with the front side facing up)

2-22

Setting Paper Size and Type

O riginals and Print M

edia

Setting Paper Size and Type

This section describes how to set paper size and type loaded into the paper drawer(s) and stack bypass tray.

For the Stack Bypass Tray

You can register a frequently used paper size and type for the stack bypass tray. The default setting is .

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

2-23

Setting Paper Size and Type O

riginals and Print M edia

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press the right Any key to select .

If you do not want to set the stack bypass standard settings, select , then press [OK], and press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

If you register a standard paper size:

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper size, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper sizes: , , , , , , , , , , , , ,

, ,

If you register an irregular paper size:

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select (length for the short edge), then press [OK].

If the irregular paper sizes have previously been set, you can recall the size setting. For details, see If you register an irregular paper size by recalling the previously set size:, on p. 2-24.

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the length for X (short edge), then press [OK].

If you use A/B size paper, press the left Any key to select
and select the paper size you want to use.

2-24

Setting Paper Size and Type

O riginals and Print M

edia

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select (length for the long edge), then press .

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the length for Y (long edge), then press [OK].

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If you register an irregular paper size by recalling the previously set size:

You can recall the previously set paper size. For instructions on how to register the irregular paper size, see Registering Irregular Paper Sizes for the Stack Bypass Tray, on p. 2-26.

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Press the right Any key to select .

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

The recalled paper size is displayed.

2-25

Setting Paper Size and Type O

riginals and Print M edia

You can also edit the previously set size or register a new irregular size from this display. Press the right Any key to select select or press [OK] specify the lengths for and select press the right Any key to select select press [OK].

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper type, then press [OK].

The selectable paper types vary depending on the paper size you have specified. The unavailable paper types are grayed out on the display.

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select [On], then press [OK].

8 Press right Any key to select Done.

9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

2-26

Setting Paper Size and Type

O riginals and Print M

edia

Registering Irregular Paper Sizes for the Stack Bypass Tray

You can register two irregular paper sizes for the stack bypass tray. You can recall the registered size when you use irregular paper size on the stack bypass tray. For details, see Recalling Irregular Paper Size Registered for the Stack Bypass Tray, on p. 4-17.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select (length for the short edge), then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the length for X (short edge), then press [OK].

2-27

Setting Paper Size and Type O

riginals and Print M edia

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select (length for the long edge), then press [OK].

9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the length for Y (long edge), then press [OK].

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

11 Press the right Any key to select .

If you want to register the other custom paper size, select or , then repeat steps 6 to 10.

12 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

You can use the irregular paper size registered with the procedure above for the setting, which is useful if you frequently use the same irregular size paper. For details, see Setting Paper Size and Type, on p. 2-22.

2-28

Setting Paper Size and Type

O riginals and Print M

edia

For the Paper Drawer

When you place other sizes and/or types of paper, follow this procedure to change the settings. The default settings are and .

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or *, then press [OK]. * Only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper

Drawer 2) is attached.

2-29

Setting Paper Size and Type O

riginals and Print M edia

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper size, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper sizes: , , , , , , If you use A/B size paper, press the left Any key to select
and perform the step above.

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper type, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper types: , , , , , If you use the paper drawer 2*, repeat the steps 4 to 6 for the paper drawer 2*.

* Only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) is attached.

7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

2-30

Setting Paper Size and Type

O riginals and Print M

edia

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

This chapter describes how to register destinations in the Address Book, and how to edit and erase registered information.

Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Chapter 3 Storing/Editing Address Book ....................................3-2

Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book .........3-2 Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book ..............................................3-7 Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book...................................................................... 3-10 Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book ............................... 3-13 Registering I-Fax Addresses in the Address Book...................................................................... 3-16 Registering File Server Addresses in the Address Book...................................................................... 3-18 Registering Group Addresses in the Address Book...................................................................... 3-24 Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in the Address Book...................................................................... 3-27 Erasing Addresses from the Address Book .............. 3-30

Storing/Editing One-Touch .......................................3-32 Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch ................... 3-32 Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch ............................................ 3-37 Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch ........... 3-40 Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch ............................................ 3-43 Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-Touch .............. 3-46 Registering File Server Addresses in One-Touch ... 3-49 Registering Group Addresses in One-Touch ........... 3-55 Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in One-Touch ........................................................................... 3-59 Erasing Addresses Registered in One-Touch .......... 3-62

3-2

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

Storing/Editing Address Book

The Address Book is a feature used for storing fax numbers, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses. You can also register multiple destinations for a group address. Registering a destination in the Address Book saves you the effort of entering that destinations address each time you send a job.

Storing addresses in the Address Book is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn. You can register a total of 300 destinations in the Address Book, including 200 destinations registered in one-touch. Each address entry is treated as a single entry, so if a destination is registered in a group address, that destination and the group address are counted as two entries. Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file, which can be imported into the machine. For information on how to export and import the Address Book, see Setting from a PC, in the e-Manual. For easy reference, it is recommended to print the list of recipients registered in the Address Book and one-touch. For information on how to print the lists, see Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual. New destinations cannot be registered in the Address Book if in in is set to .

Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book

This section describes the procedure for registering fax numbers in the Address Book.

This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select .

3-3

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.) 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Press the right Any key to select . 6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 8 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipients name. You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipients name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19. Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipients name, in alphabetical order.

3-4

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

11 Use (numeric keys) to enter the fax number.

You can enter up to 40 characters for fax number. If you want to move the position of the cursor, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel). If you want to delete the number or character immediately to the left of the cursor, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If you want to insert a pause of several seconds, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If you insert a pause within the fax number, the letter

is displayed between the numbers. If you insert a pause at the end of the fax number, the letter

appears. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code, and at the end of the fax number. If you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), which accepts only tone signals, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If you want to insert a space between numbers, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If you want to delete the entire number you entered, press (Clear).

For information on how to set the length of a pause, see Communications Settings, on p. 13-8. For information on how to insert a pause for an overseas number, see Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses), on p. 5-22. You cannot insert a pause or a space at the beginning of a number. If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.

3-5

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

12 If you want to set the ECM TX, sending speed, and long distance settings, press the right Any key to select .

These settings are optional. If you do not want to set the optional settings, skip to step 20.

13 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

14 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

15 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

16 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the sending speed, then press [OK].

If your document transmissions are slow to start, it may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select <33600 bps>, <14400 bps>, <9600 bps>, or <4800 bps>.

17 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3-6

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

18 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the long distance setting, then press [OK].

Select for dialing domestic (local) telephone numbers. Select if communication errors frequently occur when you make overseas calls (when the overseas telephone number is registered in the Address Book). If errors persist, try selecting or .

19 Press the right Any key to select .

20 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

21 Press the right Any key to select .

If you want to register another fax number, repeat from step 6.

22 Press the right Any key to select .

23 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-7

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book

This section describes how to register the fax numbers that are obtained by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.

This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.) 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Press the right Any key to select . 6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3-8

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

7 Follow steps 4 to 7 in Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP Server, on p. 5-43 to search destinations.

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].

You can select up to 32 destinations. If you want to select the first 32 destinations, press the left Any key to select

and use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select . (If a destination is selected, changes to .) To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark. You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations. 9 Press the right Any key to select . If only one destination is selected: Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Confirm the recipients name, then press the right Any key to select . If you edit the recipients name obtained from the search results, see Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book, on p. 3-2. Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipients name, in alphabetical order. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3-9

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

Confirm the destination.

If you edit the destination obtained from the search results and specify the optional settings, see Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book, on p. 3-2.

Use[], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Press the right Any key to select .

If multiple destinations are selected:

Confirm the message shown on the display, then press the right Any key to select .

10 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-10

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book

This section describes the procedure for registering e-mail addresses in the Address Book.

By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address. This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.) 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Press the right Any key to select .

3-11

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipients name.

You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipients name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipients name, in alphabetical order.

9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

11 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipients e-mail address.

You can enter up to 120 characters for the e- mail address. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

3-12

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

12 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

13 Press the right Any key to select .

If you want to register another e-mail address, repeat from step 6.

14 Press the right Any key to select .

15 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-13

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in the Address Book

This section describes how to register the e-mail addresses that are obtained by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.

By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address. This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.) 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Press the right Any key to select .

3-14

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Follow steps 4 to 7 in E-mail, in the e-Manual to search destinations.

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].

You can select up to 32 destinations. If you want to select the first 32 destinations, press the left Any key to select

and use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select . (If a destination is selected, changes to .) If you press the left Any key to select and use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , the selected e-mail address can be specified as an I-fax destination. To register e-mail addresses as I-fax addresses, register one e-mail address at a time. To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark. You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations. 9 Press the right Any key to select . If only one destination is selected: Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Confirm the recipients name, then press the right Any key to select . If you edit the recipients name obtained from the search results, see Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book, on p. 3-10. Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipients name, in alphabetical order.

3-15

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Confirm the destination, then press the right Any key to select .

If you edit the destination obtained from the search results, see Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book, on p. 3-10.

Press the right Any key to select .

If multiple destinations are selected:

Confirm the message shown on the display, then press the right Any key to select .

10 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-16

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

Registering I-Fax Addresses in the Address Book

This section describes the procedure for registering I-fax addresses in the Address Book.

This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.) 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Press the right Any key to select . 6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3-17

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipients name.

You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipients name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipients name, in alphabetical order.

9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

11 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipients I-fax address.

You can enter up to 120 characters for the I- fax address. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

12 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

3-18

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

13 Press the right Any key to select .

If you want to register another I-fax address, repeat from step 6.

14 Press the right Any key to select .

15 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Registering File Server Addresses in the Address Book

This section describes the procedure for registering file server addresses in the Address Book.

If in Common Settings is set to , the Host Name and File Path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them. This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.)

3-19

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Press the right Any key to select .

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use the software keyboard to enter the file server name.

You can enter up to 16 characters for the file server name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipients name, in alphabetical order.

9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3-20

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

11 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select a server protocol, then press [OK].

: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running Sun Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet Information Services 5.0 on Windows 2000 Server, Internet Information Services 5.1 on Windows XP Professional, Internet Information Services 6.0 on Windows Server 2003, Internet Information Services 7.0 on Windows Vista/Server 2008, Internet Information Services 7.5 under Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, or Red Hat Linux 7.2. : Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later) or Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008. : Select this protocol if you want to specify a file server connected to a specific network.

After turning the main power on, you must wait for the time set in the Startup Time Settings to elapse before selecting . Network transmission is not possible until this startup time has elapsed. (See Network Settings, in the e-Manual.)

If you select or :

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use the software keyboard to enter the host name.

You can enter up to 47 characters (120 characters if is selected) for the host name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

A host name is a unique name assigned to identify each host computer that provides services on the Internet. In this entry box, enter the name of the file server on the network as the destination of the send job.

If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

3-21

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use the software keyboard to enter the path to the folder.

You can enter up to 120 characters for the folder path. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

A file path is a series of characters that signify the location of the folder. Specify a folder in the file server as the destination of the send job. If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the folder name set in imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only).

If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use the software keyboard to enter the user name.

You can enter up to 24 characters for the user name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the user name set in imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only).

3-22

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use the software keyboard to enter the password.

You can enter up to 24 characters when is selected as the server protocol, or up to 14 when is selected. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the password set in imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only).

If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

Press the right Any key to select .

Press the right Any key to select .

3-23

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

If you select :

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired workgroup, then press [OK].

If the desired workgroup is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired workgroup.

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired file server, then press [OK].

If the desired file server is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired file server.

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired file server, then press the right Any key to select .

To enter the user name and the network password, select a file server from the list and press [OK]. Enter the user name (up to 24 character) and network password (up to 14 characters), then press the right Any key to select .

Specify the folder path, user name, and password as described from steps 5 to 11 in If you select or on p. 3-20.

Press the right Any key to select .

3-24

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

Press the right Any key to select .

If you want to register another file server address, repeat from step 6.

12 Press the right Any key to select .

13 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Registering Group Addresses in the Address Book

The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 299 stored destinations as a single destination.

You cannot register new destinations in a group address. New destinations need to be registered in the Address Book before you can register them as part of a group address. The types of destinations you can register in a group address are fax numbers, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses. You cannot register a group address in a group address. This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 6. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.)

3-25

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Press the right Any key to select .

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use the software keyboard to enter the group name.

You can enter up to 16 characters for the group name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its name, in alphabetical order.

9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3-26

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

11 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination to store in the group address, then press [OK].

To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again and press [OK] to clear the check mark. Use [] or [] to select the index key (e.g., [ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries. Select [All] to return to the full address list. If the desired destination is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired destination. You can select a destination and press the left Any key to select

to confirm the detailed information related to the selected destination. Press the right Any key to select to return to the previous screen. 12 Repeat step 11 to select all destinations you want to register in the group address, then press the right Any key to select . 13 Press the right Any key to select . If you want to register another group address, repeat from step 6. 14 Press the right Any key to select . 15 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-27

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in the Address Book

This section describes the procedure for checking and editing the details of the destinations registered in the Address Book.

This section describes how to check and edit the details of the destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also check and edit the details from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination you want to check or edit. Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.) 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3-28

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination you want to check or edit, then press the left Any key to select .

You cannot check or edit multiple destinations at the same time. Use [] or [] to select the index key (e.g., [ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries. Select [All] to return to the full address list. If the desired destination is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired destination. If you select [All], destinations registered in one-touch are also displayed. However, you cannot edit those destinations. For information on how to edit the destinations registered in one-touch, see Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in One-Touch, on p. 3-59.

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Check or edit the address details.

If you want to check the address details:

Check the details, then press the right Any key to select .

If you want to edit the address details:

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the item you want to edit, then press [OK].

Confirm that is selected, then press [OK].

3-29

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

Edit the address details.

Follow the same procedure as you used when registering destinations.

For information on how to register fax numbers, see Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book, on p. 3-2. For information on how to register e-mail addresses, see Registering E-Mail Addresses in the Address Book, on p. 3-10. For information on how to register I-fax addresses, see Registering I-Fax Addresses in the Address Book, on p. 3-16. For information on how to register file server addresses, see Registering File Server Addresses in the Address Book on p. 3-18. For information on how to register group addresses, see Registering Group Addresses in the Address Book, on p. 3-24.

Press the right Any key to select .

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-30

Storing/Editing Address Book

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

Erasing Addresses from the Address Book

This section describes the procedure for erasing addresses from the Address Book.

This section describes how to erase the destinations registered in the Address Book from the Additional Functions screen. You can also erase them from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination you want to erase. Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.) 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination you want to check or edit, then press the left Any key to select .

3-31

Storing/Editing Address Book Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

You cannot erase multiple destinations at the same time. Use [] or [] to select the index key (e.g., [ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries. Select [All] to return to the full address list. If the desired destination is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired destination. If you select [All], destinations registered in one-touch are also displayed. However, you cannot delete those destinations. For information on how to delete the destinations registered in one-touch, see Erasing Addresses Registered in One-Touch, on p. 3-62.

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If you want to cancel erasing the destination, select .

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-32

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

Storing/Editing One-Touch

You can register up to 200 destinations in one-touch.

Each address entry is treated as a single entry, so if a destination is registered in a group address, that destination and the group address are counted as two entries. Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file, which can be imported into the machine. For information on how to export and import the Address Book, see Setting from a PC, in the e-Manual. For easy reference, it is recommended to print the list of recipients registered in the Address Book and one-touch. For information on how to print the lists, see Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual. New destinations cannot be registered in one-touch if in in is set to .

Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch

This section describes the procedure for registering fax numbers in one-touch.

This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select . Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.)

3-33

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipients name.

You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipients name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipients name, in alphabetical order.

9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

3-34

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

11 Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.

You can enter up to 12 characters for the one- touch name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

12 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

13 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

14 Use (numeric keys) to enter the fax number.

You can enter up to 40 characters for fax number. If you want to move the position of the cursor, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel). If you want to delete the number or character immediately to the left of the cursor, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If you want to insert a pause of several seconds, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If you insert a pause within the fax number, the letter

is displayed between the numbers. If you insert a pause at the end of the fax number, the letter

appears. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code, and at the end of the fax number. If you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), which accepts only tone signals, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If you want to insert a space between numbers, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3-35

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

If you want to delete the entire number you entered, press (Clear).

For information on how to set the length of a pause, see Communications Settings, on p. 13-8. For information on how to insert a pause for an overseas number, see Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses), on p. 5-22. You cannot insert a pause or a space at the beginning of a number. If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.

15 If you want to set the ECM TX, sending speed, and long distance settings, press the right Any key to select .

These settings are optional. If you do not want to set the optional settings, skip to step 23.

16 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

17 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

18 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

19 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the sending speed, then press [OK].

If your document transmissions are slow to start, it may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select <33600 bps>, <14400 bps>, <9600 bps>, or <4800 bps>.

3-36

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

20 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

21 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the long distance setting, then press [OK].

Select for dialing domestic (local) telephone numbers. Select if communication errors frequently occur when you make overseas calls (when the overseas telephone number is registered in the Address Book). If errors persist, try selecting or .

22 Press the right Any key to select .

23 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

24 Press the right Any key to select .

If you want to register another fax number, repeat from step 5.

25 Press the right Any key to select .

26 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-37

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

Registering Fax Numbers Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch

This section describes how to register the fax numbers that are obtained by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.

This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select . Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.) 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].

3-38

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Follow steps 4 to 7 in Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP Server, on p. 5-43 to search destinations.

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].

You cannot select multiple destinations at a time.

To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark. You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.

9 Press the right Any key to select .

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

11 Confirm the recipients name, then press the right Any key to select .

If you edit the recipients name obtained from the search results, see Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch, on p. 3-32.

Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipients name, in alphabetical order.

3-39

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

12 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

13 Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name, then press the right Any key to select .

You can enter up to 12 characters for the one- touch name. For information on using the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

14 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

15 Confirm the destination.

If you edit the destination obtained from the search results and specify the optional settings, see Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch, on p. 3-32.

16 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

17 Press the right Any key to select .

18 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-40

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch

This section describes the procedure for registering e-mail addresses in one-touch.

By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address. This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select . Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.) 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK]. 6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3-41

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipients name.

You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipients name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipients name, in alphabetical order.

9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

11 Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.

You can enter up to 12 characters for the one- touch name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

12 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

3-42

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

13 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

14 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipients e-mail address.

You can enter up to 120 characters for the e- mail address. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

15 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

16 Press the right Any key to select .

If you want to register another e-mail address, repeat from step 5.

17 Press the right Any key to select .

18 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-43

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

Registering E-Mail Addresses Obtained via an LDAP Server in One-Touch

This section describes how to register the e-mail addresses that are obtained by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.

By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply e-mail address. This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select . Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.) 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].

3-44

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Follow steps 4 to 7 in E-mail, in the e-Manual to search destinations.

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].

You cannot select multiple destinations at a time. If you press the left Any key to select

and use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , the selected e-mail address can be specified as an I-fax destination. To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark. You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations. 9 Press the right Any key to select . 10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 11 Confirm the recipients name, then press the right Any key to select . If you edit the recipients name obtained from the search results, see Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch, on p. 3-40. Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipients name, in alphabetical order.

3-45

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

12 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

13 Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name, then press the right Any key to select .

You can enter up to 12 characters for the one- touch name. For information on using the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

14 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

15 Confirm the destination, then press the right Any key to select .

If you edit the destination obtained from the search results, see Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch, on p. 3-40.

16 Press the right Any key to select .

17 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-46

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.) 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK]. Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-Touch This section describes the procedure for registering I-fax addresses in one-touch. This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows: In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select . Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.

3-47

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipients name.

You can enter up to 16 characters for the recipients name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipients name, in alphabetical order.

9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

11 Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.

You can enter up to 12 characters for the one- touch name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

3-48

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

12 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

13 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

14 Use the software keyboard to enter the recipients I-fax address.

You can enter up to 120 characters for the I- fax address. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

15 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

16 Press the right Any key to select .

If you want to register another I-fax address, repeat from step 5.

17 Press the right Any key to select .

18 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-49

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

Registering File Server Addresses in One-Touch

This section describes the procedure for registering file server addresses in one-touch.

If in Common Settings is set to , the Host Name and File Path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them. This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select . Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.) 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].

3-50

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use the software keyboard to enter the file server name.

You can enter up to 16 characters for the file server name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its recipients name, in alphabetical order.

9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

11 Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.

You can enter up to 12 characters for the one- touch name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

3-51

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

12 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

13 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

14 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select a server protocol, then press [OK].

: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running Sun Solaris 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Internet Information Services 5.0 on Windows 2000 Server, Internet Information Services 5.1 on Windows XP Professional, Internet Information Services 6.0 on Windows Server 2003, Internet Information Services 7.0 on Windows Vista/Server 2008, Internet Information Services 7.5 under Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, or Red Hat Linux 7.2.

: Select this protocol if you are sending documents to a computer running UNIX/Linux (Samba 2.2.8a or later) or Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008. : Select this protocol if you want to specify a file server connected to a specific network.

After turning the main power on, you must wait for the time set in the Startup Time Settings to elapse before selecting . Network transmission is not possible until this startup time has elapsed. (See Network Settings, in the e-Manual.)

If you select or :

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use the software keyboard to enter the host name.

You can enter up to 47 characters (120 characters if is selected) for the host name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

3-52

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

A host name is a unique name assigned to identify each host computer that provides services on the Internet. In this entry box, enter the name of the file server on the network as the destination of the send job.

If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use the software keyboard to enter the path to the folder.

You can enter up to 120 characters for the folder path. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

A file path is a series of characters that signify the location of the folder. Specify a folder in the file server as the destination of the send job. If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the folder name set in imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only).

If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use the software keyboard to enter the user name.

You can enter up to 24 characters for the user name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

3-53

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the user name set in imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only).

If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use the software keyboard to enter the password.

You can enter up to 24 characters when is selected as the server protocol, or up to 14 when is selected. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

If you are sending to an imageWARE Document Manager folder, enter the password set in imageWARE Gateway (Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn only).

If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

Press the right Any key to select .

Press the right Any key to select .

3-54

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

If you select :

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired workgroup, then press [OK].

If the desired workgroup is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired workgroup.

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired file server, then press [OK].

If the desired file server is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired file server.

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired file server, then press the right Any key to select .

To enter the user name and the network password, select a file server from the list and press [OK]. Enter the user name (up to 24 character) and network password (up to 14 characters), then press the right Any key to select .

Specify the folder path, user name, and password as described from steps 5 to 11 in If you select or , on p. 3-51.

Press the right Any key to select .

Press the right Any key to select .

If you want to register another file server address, repeat from step 5.

3-55

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

15 Press the right Any key to select . 16 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Registering Group Addresses in One-Touch

The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 299 stored destinations (199 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) as a single destination.

You cannot register new destinations in a group address. New destinations need to be registered in the Address Book before you can register them as part of a group address. The types of destinations you can register in a group address are fax numbers, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses. You cannot register a group address in a group address. This section describes how to register destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also register destinations from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select . Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 5.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.)

3-56

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to register, then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use the software keyboard to enter the group name.

You can enter up to 16 characters for the group name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

Registered destinations are sorted in the Address Book by its name, in alphabetical order.

9 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3-57

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

11 Use the software keyboard to enter the one-touch name.

You can enter up to 12 characters for the one- touch name. For information on how to use the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

12 If you are finished, press the right Any key to select .

13 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

14 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination to store in the group address, then press [OK].

To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again and press [OK] to clear the check mark. Use [] or [] to select the index key (e.g., [ABC]) to restrict the display range of entries. Select [All] to return to the full address list. If the desired destination is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired destination. You can select a destination and press the left Any key to select

to confirm the detailed information related to the selected destination. Press the right Any key to select to return to the previous screen. 15 Repeat step 14 to select all destinations you want to register in the group address, then press the right Any key to select .

3-58

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

16 Press the right Any key to select .

If you want to register another group address, repeat from step 5.

17 Press the right Any key to select .

18 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-59

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

Checking/Editing Addresses Registered in One-Touch

This section describes the procedure for checking and editing the details of the destinations registered in one-touch.

This section describes how to check and edit the details of the destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also check and edit the details from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to check or edit. Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.)

3-60

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to check or edit, then press [OK].

You cannot check or edit multiple one-touch destinations at the same time. If the desired one-touch is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired one-touch.

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. 7 Check or edit the address details. If you want to check the address details: Check the details, then press the right Any key to select . If you want to edit the address details: Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the item you want to edit, then press [OK]. Confirm that is selected, then press [OK].

3-61

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

Edit the address details.

Follow the same procedure as you used when registering destinations.

For information on how to register fax numbers, see Registering Fax Numbers in One- Touch, on p. 3-32. For information on how to register e-mail addresses, see Registering E-Mail Addresses in One-Touch, on p. 3-40. For information on how to register I-fax addresses, see Registering I-Fax Addresses in One-Touch, on p. 3-46. For information on how to register file server addresses, see Registering File Server Addresses in One-Touch, on p. 3-49. For information on how to register group addresses, see Registering Group Addresses in One-Touch, on p. 3-55.

Press the right Any key to select .

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-62

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

Erasing Addresses Registered in One-Touch

This section describes the procedure for erasing addresses registered in one-touch.

This section describes how to erase one-touch destinations from the Additional Functions screen. You can also erase them from the Select Send Type screen, as follows:

In the Select Send Type screen, press the right Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to erase. Press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow the procedure described in this section from step 7.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. If a password has been set for the Address Book, enter the password to enter Address Book Settings menu. Enter the password using (numeric keys), then press [OK]. (For details about the Address Book password, see Security, in the e-Manual.) 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the one-touch you want to erase, then press [OK]. You cannot erase multiple one-touch destinations at the same time. If the desired one-touch is not displayed, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to scroll to the desired one-touch.

3-63

Storing/Editing One-Touch Registering D

estinations in the Address Book

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If you want to cancel erasing the destination, select .

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

3-64

Storing/Editing One-Touch

Registering D estinations in the Address Book

Copying

4-1

This chapter describes the copying features.

Copying Chapter 4

Overview of Copy Functions .......................................4-2 Basic Copying Method ................................................4-4 Canceling Copy Jobs ....................................................4-6 Selecting Color Mode ..................................................4-7 Selecting Paper Source ...............................................4-9

Copying on Paper in Drawers ..........................................4-9 Using Stack Bypass Tray with Standard Paper Sizes .......................................................................... 4-11 Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular Sizes of Paper ..................................................................... 4-13 Using Stack Bypass Tray with Envelopes .................. 4-15 Recalling Irregular Paper Size Registered for the Stack Bypass Tray ...................................................... 4-17

Adjusting Density ......................................................4-19 Adjusting Base Color ....................................................... 4-21

2-Sided Copying ........................................................4-23 1 to 2-Sided Copying ....................................................... 4-24 2 to 2-Sided Copying ....................................................... 4-26 2 to 1-Sided Copying ....................................................... 4-28

Enlarge/Reduce Images ............................................4-31 Preset Zoom........................................................................ 4-31 Custom Copy Ratio........................................................... 4-33

Selecting Image Quality ............................................4-35 Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1).............4-37 Making ID Card Copies ..............................................4-40 Adjusting Sharpness .................................................4-42 Erasing Shadows/Lines .............................................4-44

Original Frame Erase ........................................................ 4-45 Book Frame Erase ............................................................. 4-48 Binding Erase ...................................................................... 4-51

Adjusting Color Balance ............................................4-54 Registering Color Balance .............................................. 4-56 Recalling Registered Color Balance ............................ 4-58 Deleting Color Balance ................................................... 4-59

Collating Copies .........................................................4-60 Making Multiple Copies ............................................4-62 Checking Current Settings ........................................4-63

Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory) .............4-64 Registering Mode Memory ........................................... 4-64 Recalling Mode Memory ................................................ 4-66 Checking Mode Memory ............................................... 4-67 Deleting Mode Memory ................................................. 4-68

Changing Standard Mode .........................................4-69 Initializing Standard Mode .......................................4-71 Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy Logs ............................................................................4-72

Checking Copy Jobs ........................................................ 4-72 Canceling Copy Jobs ....................................................... 4-73 Checking Copy Logs ........................................................ 4-74

Copying

4-2

Overview of Copy Functions

Overview of Copy Functions

In addition to the enlarging/reducing the copy, you can make 2-sided copies or use the N on 1 mode, which reduces multiple originals to fit on one sheet of paper.

(p. 4-11)

(p. 4-35)

(p. 4-19)

Copying

4-3

Overview of Copy Functions

(p. 4-23)

(p. 4-31)

(p. 4-37)

Copying

4-4

Basic Copying Method

Basic Copying Method

This section describes the basic procedure for copying.

1 Place originals on the platen glass or load it them in the feeder.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4. Close the feeder after placing your originals. For originals you can copy, see Originals Requirements, on p. 2-2. When the display shows the message , enter the department ID and password. Then press (Log In/Out) on the control panel. For details, see Security in the e-Manual.

When in from the Additional Functions screen is set to , you can make black and white copies without entering and . (For details, see Accepting B&W Copy Jobs without Entering the Department ID and Password, in the e-Manual.) To make black and white copies, press the right Any key to select .

When the display shows the message , enter the user ID and password. Then press (Log In/Out) on the control panel. For details, see Security in the e-Manual.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Make the copy settings you require.

You can specify the following settings: : Specifies the color or B&W. (See Selecting Color Mode, on p. 4-7.) : Specifies the paper source. (See Selecting Paper Source, on p. 4-9.) : Adjusts the density and the background color of originals. (See Adjusting Density, on p. 4-19.) : Makes two-sided copies. (See 2-Sided Copying, on p. 4-23.) : Adjusts the size by enlarging/reducing original images. (See Enlarge/Reduce Images, on p. 4-31.) : Specifies the image type of originals. (See Selecting Image Quality, on p. 4-35.)

Copying

4-5

Basic Copying Method

: Reduces multiple originals to fit on one sheet of paper. (See Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1), on p. 4-37.) : Adjusts the contrast of the originals. (See Adjusting Sharpness, on p. 4-42.) : Erases unnecessary shadows and lines. (See Erasing Shadows/Lines, on p. 4-44.) : Adjusts the color balance for the copy. (See Adjusting Color Balance, on p. 4-54.) : Sorts copies into sets. (See Collating Copies, on p. 4-60.) : Makes ID card copies. (See Making ID Card Copies, on p. 4-40.) : Makes multiple copies. (See Making Multiple Copies, on p. 4-62.) When you press (Reset), all settings will return to the Standard mode. If you want to keep your own settings as the Standard mode, see Changing Standard Mode, on p. 4-69.

5 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

If you make a mistake when entering values, press (Clear) and enter the correct values. The copy quantity appears on the right side of the Copy top screen.

You cannot change the copy quantity while the machine is copying.

6 Press (Start) to start copying.

When scanning is complete, remove your originals.

You cannot change copy mode settings, such as the copy quantity, paper size, and copy ratio, while the machine is copying.

If you want to cancel a copy job, see Canceling Copy Jobs, on p. 4-6, or Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy Logs, on p. 4-72. To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset). If the machine remains idle for more than two minutes, the display returns to the Main Menu screen (Auto Clear Time). You can change the value of time for the Auto Clear Time. For details, see Setting Auto Clear Time, on p. 1-23. If you want to make another copy when there is an ongoing job, press the right Any key to select . Then repeat from the step 1.

7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-6

Canceling Copy Jobs

Canceling Copy Jobs

You can cancel scanning or ongoing jobs.

If you cancel a copy job during scanning, make sure to remove the original.

1 Press the left Any key to select .

The display will return to the Copy top screen.

While the machine is scanning, printing, or waiting to print, you can cancel a copy job by pressing (Stop).

2 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-7

Selecting Color Mode

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the color mode, then press [OK].

: For the automatic selection of color or B&W* : For copies in full-color : For black and white copies

* Depending on the condition of the originals, the machine may not be able to properly distinguish between color and black-and- white originals.

Selecting Color Mode

This section describes how to select the color mode (color/B&W). The default setting is .

Copying

4-8

Selecting Color Mode

6 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

7 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-9

Selecting Paper Source

Selecting Paper Source

You can manually specify a paper source. The default setting is .

If you are copying an original with an image that extends all the way to the edges onto the same size paper at a copy ratio of 100%, the periphery of the original image may be cut off slightly on the copy. For details, see Scanning Area, on p. 11-4. The suffix (such as in STMTR), used in paper size designations, indicates that the paper is loaded in a paper drawer or the stack bypass tray horizontally.

Copying on Paper in Drawers

You can select paper drawer 1 or 2 (optional) for a copy. You need to set up the paper size and type for each drawer in advance. For details about configuring the paper size and type, see Setting Paper Size and Type, on p. 2-22.

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

Copying

4-10

Selecting Paper Source

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired paper source, then press [OK].

6 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

7 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-11

Selecting Paper Source

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Load the paper into the stack bypass tray.

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired paper size, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper sizes: , , , , , , , , , For details, see Paper Requirements, on p. 2-7.

The available paper sizes will vary depending on the country where the unit was purchased.

Using Stack Bypass Tray with Standard Paper Sizes

This section describes how to copy onto standard-sized paper using the stack bypass tray.

If setting in from the Additional Functions screen is set to , the paper size/type setting screen appears when you load paper in the stack bypass tray. If is set to , copying can be performed only for the registered paper size and type. (See Setting Paper Size and Type, on p. 2-22.)

Copying

4-12

Selecting Paper Source

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired paper type, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper types: , , , , , , , , For details, see Paper Requirements, on p. 2-7.

If you want to print the back side of the printed paper, press the right Any key to select <2nd of 2- Sided>.

7 Press [OK] to select .

The selected paper size is displayed next to .

8 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

9 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

10 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-13

Selecting Paper Source

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Load the paper into the stack bypass tray.

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Press [OK] to select the horizontal length .

Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular Sizes of Paper

This section describes how to copy onto non-standard-sized paper using the stack bypass tray.

If setting in from the Additional Functions screen is set to , the paper size/type setting screen appears when you load paper in the stack bypass tray. If is set to , copying can be performed only for the registered paper size and type. (See Setting Paper Size and Type, on p. 2-22.)

Copying

4-14

Selecting Paper Source

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the length of X, then press [OK].

You can adjust values for between 3 (76 mm) and 8 1/2 (216 mm).

8 Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the vertical length , then press [OK].

9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the length of Y, then press [OK].

You can adjust values for between 5 (127 mm) and 14 (356 mm).

10 Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

11 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired paper type, then press [OK].

You can select from the following paper types: , , , , , , , , For details, see Paper Requirements, on p. 2-7.

If you want to print the back side of the printed paper, press the right Any key to select <2nd of 2- Sided>.

12 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Copying

4-15

Selecting Paper Source

Using Stack Bypass Tray with Envelopes

This section describes how to copy onto envelopes using the stack bypass tray.

If setting in from the Additional Functions screen is set to , the paper size/type setting screen appears when you load paper in the stack bypass tray. If is set to , copying can be performed only for the registered paper size and type. (See Setting Paper Size and Type, on p. 2-22.)

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

13 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99). 14 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

15 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-16

Selecting Paper Source

4 Load envelopes into the stack bypass.

For details, see In the Stack Bypass Tray, on p. 2-16.

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired size of envelopes, then press [OK].

You can select from the following sizes of envelopes: , ,

, , For details, see Paper Requirements, on p. 2-7. 6 Press [OK] to select . The selected paper size is displayed next to . 7 Press (Start). 8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-17

Selecting Paper Source

Recalling Irregular Paper Size Registered for the Stack Bypass Tray

You can easily set the frequently used irregular paper size for the paper loaded in the stack bypass tray by recalling the pre-registered paper size. For details, see Registering Irregular Paper Sizes for the Stack Bypass Tray, on p. 2-26.

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Load the paper into the stack bypass tray.

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Press the right Any key to select .

Copying

4-18

Selecting Paper Source

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Make sure that the recalled paper size is the same as the actual size of the paper you loaded in the stack bypass tray in step 4. If not, set the correct paper size. (See Using Stack Bypass Tray with Irregular Sizes of Paper, on p. 4-13.)

9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper type, then press [OK].

You can select the paper type from the following: , , , , , , , , For details, see Paper Requirements,on p. 2-7.

If you want to print the back side of the printed paper, press the right Any key to select <2nd of 2- Sided>.

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

11 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

12 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

13 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-19

Adjusting Density

Adjusting Density

You can manually adjust the copy exposure to the most appropriate level for the original. The copy tone becomes lighter as the indicator moves to the left, and darker as it moves to the right. The default setting is <0>.

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

Copying

4-20

Adjusting Density

5 Use [], [], [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the copy density, then press [OK].

To make dark originals lighter, move the density scale to the left. To make light originals darker, move the density scale to the right.

6 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

7 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-21

Adjusting Density

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Press the right Any key to select .

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the background setting, then press [OK].

If you select :

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Press [OK], then skip to step 7.

Adjusting Base Color

This mode enables you to adjust or remove the base color of the originals. The default setting is .

Copying

4-22

Adjusting Density

If you select :

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].

Use [], [], [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the strength of the color, then press [OK].

Press the right Any key to select , then press [OK].

7 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

8 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-23

2-Sided Copying

2-Sided Copying

This mode enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals, or make one-sided copies from two-sided originals. This enables you to cut print costs in half when copying in large quantities. The default setting is .

When you use the feeder to make two-sided copies from two-sided originals or one-sided copies from two-sided originals, the original size must be LTR, LGL, FLSC, or A4. For the paper size that can be used for the 2-sided copying, see the following: e-Manual > Print > Printer Settings from the Machine > Settings Menu > 2-Sided (The same paper size can be used for the 2-sided copying and 2-sided printing.) 2-Sided modes cannot be used with the ID Card Copy mode.

Copying

4-24

2-Sided Copying

1 to 2-Sided Copying

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <1-Sided to 2-Sided>.

If there are odd number of originals when the 1- Sided to 2-Sided mode is used, the back side of the last copy is left blank.

6 Press the right Any key to select .

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

Copying

4-25

2-Sided Copying

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation. : The front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite top- bottom orientation.

9 Press [OK].

10 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

11 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page. After scanning all originals, press the right Any key to select .

12 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-26

2-Sided Copying

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <2-Sided to 2-Sided>, then press [OK].

6 Press the right Any key to select .

2 to 2-Sided Copying

When you use the feeder to make two-sided copies from two-sided originals, the original size must be LTR, LGL, FLSC, or A4.

Copying

4-27

2-Sided Copying

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or for the original layout, then press [OK].

: The front and back sides of the original will have the same top- bottom orientation. : The front and back sides of the original will have the opposite top-bottom orientation.

9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation. : The front and back sides of the copy will have the opposite top- bottom orientation.

10 Press [OK].

11 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

Copying

4-28

2-Sided Copying

12 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page. After scanning all originals, press the right Any key to select .

13 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

2 to 1-Sided Copying

When you use the feeder to make one-sided copies from two-sided originals, the original size must be LTR, LGL, FLSC, or A4.

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

Copying

4-29

2-Sided Copying

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <2-Sided to 1-Sided>.

6 Press the right Any key to select .

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or for the original layout, then press [OK].

: The front and back sides of the original will have the same top- bottom orientation. : The front and back sides of the original will have the opposite top-bottom orientation.

9 Press [OK].

10 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

Copying

4-30

2-Sided Copying

11 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page. After scanning all originals, press the right Any key to select .

12 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-31

Enlarge/Reduce Images

Enlarge/Reduce Images

You can convert a standard-sized original to a different standard-sized copy (preset zoom), or you can also enlarge or reduce images in 1% increments (custom copy ratio). The default setting is <100% 1:1>.

Preset Zoom

You can enlarge or reduce originals from one standard paper size to another.

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Copying

4-32

Enlarge/Reduce Images

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the zoom ratio, then press [OK].

You can select the preset zoom from the following:

<100% Direct> <200% Maximum> <129% STMTLTR> <78% LGLLTR> <64% LTRSTMT> <50% Minimum>

If you want to specify the other copy ratio, see Custom Copy Ratio, on p. 4-33.

6 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

7 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-33

Enlarge/Reduce Images

Custom Copy Ratio

You can reduce or enlarge images by any copy ratio in 1% increments. The available copy ratios are from 50% to 200%.

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the zoom ratio in 1% increments, then press [OK].

If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.

7 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

Copying

4-34

Enlarge/Reduce Images

8 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-35

Selecting Image Quality

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Selecting Image Quality

You can adjust the image quality of copies according to the types of originals. A correct selection is necessary for the optimal reproduction of the colors of the original. The default setting is .

Combinations of these four modes (Text/Photo/Map, Printed Image, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled. If the original is a transparency, select the original type, then adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.

Copying

4-36

Selecting Image Quality

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the image quality, then press [OK].

: For originals that contain text, photos, and maps

If you select , you can set priority on or . Press the right Any key to select , then use [], [], [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the priority revel.

: For originals that contain dot photos such as magazines : For photo paper originals such as photos : For originals that contain only text

6 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

7 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-37

Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)

Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)

This mode enables you to reduce multiple originals to fit on one sheet of paper (one-sided/ two-sided). You can make well-organized copies by copying multiple originals onto one sheet. This mode enables you to cut print costs by saving copy paper, and it is also useful for saving space. The default setting is .

The N on 1 mode cannot be used with the ID Card Copy, Original Frame Erase mode, Book Frame Erase, or Binding Erase mode. For details about the erase mode, see Erasing Shadows/Lines, on p. 4-44. The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals fit onto the selected paper size.

Copying

4-38

Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

When placing horizontal (landscape) originals into the feeder in the 2 on 1 mode, place the originals bottom side up.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the combination type, then press [OK].

<2 On 1>: This setting reduces two 1-sided originals or one 2-sided original to fit onto one side or both sides of the copy sheet. <4 On 1>: This setting reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to fit onto one side or both sides of the copy sheet.

If you select <4 On 1>, you can specify the copy layout. Press the right Any key to select , then select the desired layout type.

Copying

4-39

Multiple Originals onto One Sheet (N on 1)

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].

To switch to the A/B Sizes, press the left Any key to select
.

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper source, then press [OK].

If you select , specify the paper size and type.

If you want to make two-sided copies of N on 1, see 2-Sided Copying, on p. 4-23. If you want to make N on 1 copies from two- sided originals, select <2-Sided to 1-Sided> in the two-sided settings. For details, see 2-Sided Copying, on p. 4-23.

8 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

9 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page. After scanning all originals, press the right Any key to select .

10 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-40

Making ID Card Copies

Making ID Card Copies

This mode enables you to copy the both sides of an ID card on one side of paper at actual size.

The ID Card Copy mode can be combined with the Color Mode, Density/Background Rem., Original Image Quality, Collate, Copies, or Sharpness settings. Other setting combinations are not available. Place the ID card on the platen glass when using this function. Make sure that no originals are placed in the feeder. The zoom ratio is automatically set to 100% with this mode. You cannot change the copy ratio. The ID Card Copy mode can be used with LTR or A4 paper.

1 Place the ID card on the platen glass as illustrated. Place the ID card on the middle of the left side of the platen glass.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

Copying

4-41

Making ID Card Copies

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the paper source, then press [OK].

7 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

8 Press (Start).

You can adjust the copy density and base color by pressing [OK] to proceed to the Density setting display. After the settings are complete, press [OK] to return to the previous display. For details on density and base color settings, see Adjusting Density, on p. 4-19. Proceed to step 9 if density and base color adjustment is not necessary.

9 To scan one side of the ID card, press (Start).

10 To scan the other side, turn the ID card and place it on the platen glass, then press (Start).

You can adjust the copy density and base color as indicated in step 8 to scan the other side of the ID card.

11 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-42

Adjusting Sharpness

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [], [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the sharpness, then press [OK].

To make copies of printed images or other halftones, move the sharpness scale to the left. To make copies of blueprints or faint pencil- drawn images, move the sharpness scale to the right.

Adjusting Sharpness

You can set the sharpness of the copied image. If you want to copy text and lines more clearly, move the sharpness scale to the right. If you want to copy a halftone original such as a picture, move the sharpness scale to the left. The default setting is <0>.

Copying

4-43

Adjusting Sharpness

6 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

7 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-44

Erasing Shadows/Lines

Erasing Shadows/Lines

This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when using various types of originals. The following three Frame Erase modes are available: Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Binding Erase. The default setting is .

Combinations of the three Frame Erase modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled. Frame Erase modes cannot be used with the ID Card Copy mode.

Copying

4-45

Erasing Shadows/Lines

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Original Frame Erase

This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the copy if the original is smaller than the selected paper size. You can also use this mode to create a blank border around the edge of the copy.

The Original Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the N on 1 mode.

Copying

4-46

Erasing Shadows/Lines

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].

To switch to the A/B Sizes, press the left Any key to select
.

If you want to set the same width for all four borders:

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a frame erase width value, then press [OK].

The default setting is <3/16" (6 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>. To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any key to select . When entering the value in millimeters, you can also use [], [],

(Scroll Wheel), and (numeric keys). If you want to change the value, press (Clear) before entering the new value. If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.

If you want to set the top, left, right, and bottom widths independently:

Press the right Any key to select .

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired frame erase borders, then press [OK].

To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any key to select . When entering the value in millimeters, you can also use [], [], (Scroll Wheel), and (numeric keys).

Copying

4-47

Erasing Shadows/Lines

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a frame erase width value, then press [OK].

The default setting is <3/16" (6 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>. If you want to change the value, press

(Clear) before entering the new value. If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

The display will return to the Copy top screen.

7 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

8 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-48

Erasing Shadows/Lines

Book Frame Erase

This mode erases the dark borders and the center and contour lines that appear when you copy facing pages in a book or bound original onto a single sheet of paper.

The Book Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the N on 1. You must place an original on the platen glass when using this function.

1 Set an original on the platen glass.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Copying

4-49

Erasing Shadows/Lines

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].

To switch to the A/B Sizes, press the left Any key to select
.

7 Enter the each erase width value:

If you want to specify the erase width value for center:

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a frame erase width value, then press [OK]. The default setting is <3/8" (10 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>. When entering the value in millimeters, you can also use [], [], (Scroll Wheel), or (numeric keys). If you want to change the value, press (Clear) before entering the new value. If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen. If you want to specify the erase width value for all sides: Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Copying

4-50

Erasing Shadows/Lines

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a frame erase width value, then press [OK].

The default setting is <3/16" (6 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <1 15/16" (50 mm)>.

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

9 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

10 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

11 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-51

Erasing Shadows/Lines

1 Set an original on the platen glass.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Binding Erase

This mode erases the shadows that appear on copies from binding holes on originals.

Do not place originals with binding holes into the feeder, as this may damage the originals. The borders you do not select are attenuated when using this function. You must place an original on the platen glass when using this function.

Copying

4-52

Erasing Shadows/Lines

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].

To switch to the inch sizes, press the left Any key to select
.

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the hole punch location, then press [OK].

To enter values in millimeters, press the left Any key to select .

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the frame erase width, then press [OK].

The default setting is <3/4" (18 mm)>. The maximum original frame erase width that you can set is <13/16" (20 mm)>. If you want to change the value, press (Clear) before entering the new value. If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen. When entering the value in millimeters, you can also use [], [], (Scroll Wheel), or

(numeric keys).

9 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

Copying

4-53

Erasing Shadows/Lines

10 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

11 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-54

Adjusting Color Balance

1 Set documents.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].

Adjusting Color Balance

This mode enables you to adjust the color balance depending on the color of the originals. The adjusted color balance can be stored and named so that you can use them repeatedly.

Copying

4-55

Adjusting Color Balance

6 Use [], [], [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the strength of each color then, press [OK].

To weaken the selected color, move the adjust scale to the left. To heighten the selected color, move the adjust scale to the right.

7 Press the left Any key to select .

8 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

9 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

10 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-56

Adjusting Color Balance

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].

5 Use [], [], [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the strength of each color, then press [OK].

To weaken the selected color, move the adjust scale to the left. To heighten the selected color, move the adjust scale to the right.

6 Press the right Any key to select .

Registering Color Balance

This section describes how to register the color balance setting. Up to four different settings can be stored.

Copying

4-57

Adjusting Color Balance

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the memory key that you want to store the color balance setting under, then press the right Any key to select .

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select .

If you want to name the color balance setting:

Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use the software keyboard to enter a name, then press the right Any key to select .

You can enter up to 10 characters for the name. For information on using the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

10 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-58

Adjusting Color Balance

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

4 Press the right Any key to select .

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory key, then press [OK].

6 Press the left Any key to select .

7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Recalling Registered Color Balance

This section describes how to recall registered Color Balance.

Copying

4-59

Adjusting Color Balance

Deleting Color Balance

This section describes how to delete the color balance setting.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

4 Press the right Any key to select .

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the memory key that you want to delete, then press the right Any key to select .

6 Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-60

Collating Copies

Collating Copies

You can sort copies into sets arranged in page order. This function is useful when making handouts for meetings. The default setting is .

Copying

4-61

Collating Copies

1 Set originals.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).

7 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-62

Making Multiple Copies

1 Set documents.

For details, see Placing Originals, on p. 2-4.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use (numeric keys), [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 99), then press [OK].

6 Press (Start).

If you want to copy multiple originals using the platen glass, set an original and press (Start) once for each page.

7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Making Multiple Copies

This section describes how to make multiple copies.

Copying

4-63

Checking Current Settings

Checking Current Settings

This section describes how to visually confirm the settings selected for the copy.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Press the right Any key to select .

4 Check the current settings, then press the right Any key to select .

Actual scanned image of the original will not be displayed.

5 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-64

Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Press the left Any key to select .

The currently specified settings are registered for the mode memory.

Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)

You can set any possible combination of copy modes and store them as a mode memory. There are four mode memories, and they can be assigned names for increased convenience. This feature is useful for storing frequently used copy settings.

Even if the power is turned OFF, the copy settings stored in memory keys are not deleted.

Registering Mode Memory

This section describes how to register the copy settings to a mode memory.

Even if the power is turned OFF, the copy settings stored in memory keys are not deleted.

Copying

4-65

Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the mode memory key that you want to store the copy settings under, then press the right Any key to select .

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select .

If you want to name the mode memory setting:

Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use the software keyboard to enter a name, then press the right Any key to select .

You can enter up to 10 characters for the name. For information on using the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If you want to check the details of the setting, use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. 7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-66

Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Press the left Any key to select .

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired mode memory, then press [OK].

Recalling Mode Memory

This section describes how to recall the registered mode memories.

Copying

4-67

Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)

Checking Mode Memory

This section describes how to confirm the registered mode memories.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Press the left Any key to select .

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired mode memory, then press the left Any key to select

. 5 Check the details of the mode memory, then press the right Any key to select . 6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-68

Frequently Used Settings (Mode Memory)

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Press the left Any key to select .

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the mode memory key that you want to delete, then press the right Any key to select .

5 Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Deleting Mode Memory

This section describes how to delete the copy settings from the mode memory list.

Copying

4-69

Changing Standard Mode

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

The currently specified settings are registered as the standard mode.

Changing Standard Mode

The Standard mode is the combination of copy modes that the machine automatically applies when the power is turned ON, or when (Reset) is pressed. You can change the Standard mode to suit your needs.

The default settings are as follows:

: Auto-color Select : Drawer 1: LTR : 0 : Off : 100% : Text/Photo/Map : Off : 0 : Off : Default : Off : Off : 1

Copying

4-70

Changing Standard Mode

4 Press [OK] to select .

5 Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-71

Initializing Standard Mode

Initializing Standard Mode

This section describes how to initialize the current standard mode.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-72

Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy Logs

Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy Logs

This section describes how to confirm copy jobs/logs, or cancel copy jobs.

Checking Copy Jobs

You can check the status of a copy job while it is printing or waiting to be processed.

1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the left Any key to select

. 5 Check the copy status, then press the right Any key to select . 6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-73

Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy Logs

Canceling Copy Jobs

You can cancel a copy job while it is printing or waiting to be processed.

1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the right Any key to select .

If you want to check the copy information, press the left Any key to select

. 5 Use [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Copying

4-74

Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy Logs

Checking Copy Logs

You can check copy logs that contain detailed information of finished copy jobs.

1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the left Any key to select

. 5 Check the copy log, then press the right Any key to select . 6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

Fax Chapter 5

Overview of Fax Functions .............................................................. 5-2 Introduction to Using Fax Functions .............................................. 5-4

Methods for Receiving Faxes .................................................................. 5-4 Selecting the Receive Mode ................................................................... 5-9 Setting the Current Date and Time ....................................................5-12 Setting the Type of Telephone Line ...................................................5-13 Registering the Machines Name ........................................................5-14 Registering Your Machines Fax Number ..........................................5-16

Sending Faxes Sending Fax Documents ............................................................... 5-17

Basic Methods for Sending Faxes .......................................................5-17 Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual Sending) .....................................................................................5-19 Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing .............................................5-21 Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses) ...................................5-22 Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes .....................................................5-25 Basic Methods for Sending PC Faxes .................................................5-27

Canceling Sending Fax Documents .............................................. 5-29 Specifying Destinations ................................................................ 5-30

Specifying a New Fax Number .............................................................5-30 Using the Address Book .........................................................................5-34 Using the One-Touch ..............................................................................5-36 Using the Group Addresses ..................................................................5-38 Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting) ............................................................................................5-41 Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP Server ..................................5-43

Selecting Resolution ..................................................................... 5-50 Adjusting Density .......................................................................... 5-51

Manual Exposure Adjustment ............................................................5-51 Adjusting Base Color ..............................................................................5-52

Selecting Image Quality ................................................................ 5-54 2-Sided Original ............................................................................. 5-56 Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending) .............. 5-58 Direct Sending ............................................................................... 5-61 Favorites ......................................................................................... 5-63

Registering Favorites ...............................................................................5-63 Erasing Favorites .......................................................................................5-67 Using the Favorites...................................................................................5-70 Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites .........................................5-71

Job Recall ....................................................................................... 5-73 ECM Transmission .......................................................................... 5-76 Adjusting the Pause Time ............................................................. 5-78 Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial) ... 5-80

Checking the Dial Tone before Sending ...................................... 5-83 Standard Send Settings ................................................................ 5-85

Storing the Standard Send Settings ..................................................5-85 Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default ..............5-87

Printing the TX Terminal ID .......................................................... 5-89 Adjusting Sharpness ..................................................................... 5-92 Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation .............................................................................. 5-94 Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default .............. 5-96 Send Start Speed ........................................................................... 5-98 Receiving Faxes Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper .............5-100 Reducing a Received Document .................................................5-102 Printing Footer Information on a Received Document ............5-105 Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low ...................5-107 ECM Reception .............................................................................5-109 Setting the Incoming Ring Tone .................................................5-111 Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote Reception) .....................................................................5-113

Activating the Remote Reception ................................................... 5-113 Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception .................. 5-114

Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode .......5-115 Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders .......5-117 Receive Start Speed .....................................................................5-119 Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception) ...........................................................5-121 Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode ...........................................................................5-124 Forwarding Received Faxes Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine ........................................................................................5-126

Before Specifying the Forwarding Settings ................................. 5-127 Specifying Forwarding Settings ....................................................... 5-128 Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination ... 5-140 Handling Forwarding Documents .................................................. 5-141 Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors ......................... 5-143 Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors .................................................................................. 5-144

Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory ........................................................................................5-147

Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents ..................... 5-147 Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents .......................... 5-148 Checking/Printing the Fax Log ......................................................... 5-150

Fax

5-2

Overview of Fax Functions

Overview of Fax Functions

In addition to supporting the Super G3 fax functions, this machine enables you to send/ receive I-faxes and send faxes from your computer. Received fax/I-fax documents can be also forwarded to specified destinations such as other fax machines and computers.

(p. 5-17) (p. 5-25) (p. 5-27)

Fax

5-3

Overview of Fax Functions

(p. 5-30)

(p. 5-56) (p. 5-63)

(p. 5-58)

(p. 5-121) (p. 5-113)

Fax

5-4

Introduction to Using Fax Functions

Introduction to Using Fax Functions

The necessary settings before sending fax documents are as follows.

Your fax number

Register your machines fax number. (See Registering Your Machines Fax Number, on p. 5-16.)

Your personal name or company name

Register your name or company name. (See Registering the Machines Name, on p. 5-14.)

Tme and date

Set the current time and date. (See Setting the Current Date and Time, on p. 5-12.)

Your telephone lne type

Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine. (See Setting the Type of Telephone Line, on p. 5-13.)

Fax recevng mode

Set how the machine receives fax documents to suit your needs. (See Methods for Receiving Faxes, on p. 5-4.)

Methods for Receiving Faxes

Your machine provides several methods for receiving fax documents. You can receive documents automatically or manually. Follow the chart below to choose the fax receive mode that best suits your needs. The default setting is .

Fax

5-5

Introduction to Using Fax Functions

Auto RX Mode

In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically. Select this mode if you use the machine for fax operations only, and not for voice communications using an external telephone.

Before using this mode Simply set the receive mode to . (See Selecting the Receive Mode, on p. 5-9.)

When an incoming call is received With no external telephone connected to the machine:

For fax calls, the machine receives fax documents automatically. For telephone calls, you cannot talk to the caller.

With external telephone connected to the machine:

If you want to change , see Setting the Incoming Ring Tone, on p. 5-111.

Fax

5-6

Introduction to Using Fax Functions

Fax/Tel Auto Swtch Mode

In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically for fax calls and the external telephone connected to the machine rings for telephone calls. (If is set to , the external telephone rings for both fax and telephone calls. To set the telephone to ring only when a telephone call is received, set to .)

Before using this mode Make sure to do the following:

Connect your external telephone to the machine. (See Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual.) Set the receive mode to . (See Selecting the Receive Mode, on p. 5-9.) When an incoming call is received

Incoming calls or outgoing calls may not work properly, depending on the type of the external telephone connected to the machine. If you want to change , see Setting the Incoming Ring Tone, on p. 5-111. If you want to change , , or , see Selecting the Receive Mode, on p. 5-9.

Fax

5-7

Introduction to Using Fax Functions

Answer Mode

In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically for fax calls and your answering machine records a message for telephone calls.

Before using this mode Make sure to do the following:

Connect your external telephone with built-in answering machine to the machine. (See Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual.) Set your answering machine to answer after 1 to 2 rings. Record a message on your answering machine. (When you record a message, we recommend you insert about 4 seconds of silence at the beginning of the message, or limit the message to 20 seconds.) Set the receive mode to . (See Selecting the Receive Mode, on p. 5-9.) When an incoming call is received

This mode does not support voice mail. Make sure to change the receive mode if you turn off your answering machine; otherwise, the machine cannot receive fax documents automatically.

Fax

5-8

Introduction to Using Fax Functions

Manual RX Mode

In this mode, you can monitor all incoming calls by picking up the handset each time your telephone rings. This mode is a suitable option if you expect to use the machine mainly as a telephone, and only occasionally receive fax documents.

Before using this mode Make sure to do the following:

Connect your external telephone to the machine. (See Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual.) Set the receive mode to . (See Selecting the Receive Mode, on p. 5-9.) When an incoming call is received

*If is set to , you can also start to receive fax documents by dialing from your telephone. (See Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote Reception), on p. 5-113.)

If you do not pick up the handset, you receive neither telephone nor fax calls. However, setting to enables you to receive fax documents automatically after the telephone rings for a specified length of time. (See Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode, on p. 5-115.)

Fax

5-9

Introduction to Using Fax Functions

DRPD Mode

DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) service assigns two or more telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to a single telephone line, allowing you to have both a fax number(s) and a telephone number(s) using only one telephone line. Your fax will automatically monitor incoming calls and based on the ring pattern, will let you know if the call is a fax or voice call. Set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern assigned by your telephone company. Contact your telephone company for availability.

Before using this mode Make sure to do the following:

Subscribe to a DRPD service. Contact your telephone company for availability. Connect your external telephone to the machine. (See Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual.) Set the receive mode to . (See Selecting the Receive Mode, on p. 5-9.)

Selecting the Receive Mode

Select the fax receive mode to suite your needs. The default setting is .

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-10

Introduction to Using Fax Functions

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired receive mode, then press [OK].

For and , you can specify optional settings. If you want to specify the optional settings, press [OK] again.

If you specify the optional settings for :

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press the right Any key to select .

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the duration (4 to 30 seconds) for which the machine attempts to detect the fax tone before it starts ringing, then press [OK].

You can also use (numeric keys) to specify the duration. If the machine receives a fax, the machine does not ring and switches to the receive mode automatically. The default setting is <6 Seconds>.

Fax

5-11

Introduction to Using Fax Functions

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to specify the duration (15 to 300 seconds) of ringing, then press [OK].

You can also use (numeric keys) to specify the duration. The default setting is <15 Seconds>.

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the action the machine will take after the ringing ends, then press [OK].

: Disconnects the call. : Receives a fax.

If you specify the optional settings for :

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press the right Any key to select .

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select a ring pattern, then press [OK].

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-12

Introduction to Using Fax Functions

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Enter the current date and time using (numeric keys), then press [OK].

7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Setting the Current Date and Time

You can set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used as standard timer settings for functions that require them.

Fax

5-13

Introduction to Using Fax Functions

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Setting the Type of Telephone Line

Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine. If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to send faxes. Be sure to check the type of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct setting. The default setting is .

Fax

5-14

Introduction to Using Fax Functions

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

the type of telephone line, then press [OK].

: Pulse dialing : Tone dialing If you do not know the telephone line type, call your telephone service provider for details.

9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Registering the Machines Name

Your name or companys name must be registered as the machines name. When you send a document, the name that you registered is printed as the senders name on the recipients paper.

Fax

5-15

Introduction to Using Fax Functions

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use the software keyboard to enter the machines name, then press the right Any key to select .

For information on using the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-16

Introduction to Using Fax Functions

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Enter the machines fax number using (numeric keys), then press the

right Any key to select .

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Registering Your Machines Fax Number

Your machines fax number must be registered. When you send a document, the number that you registered is printed on the recipients paper.

Fax

5-17

Sending Fax Documents

Sending Fax Documents

This section describes the settings and procedures for sending fax documents.

Basic Methods for Sending Faxes

This section describes the flow of sending faxes.

1 Place your originals.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Enter the fax number using , and (numeric keys).

You can enter up to 40 characters for the fax number. For details about how to specify destinations, see Specifying Destinations, on p. 5-30.

Fax

5-18

Sending Fax Documents

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Make the scan settings you require.

You can specify the following settings: : Adjusts the resolution of originals. (See Selecting Resolution, on p. 5-50.) : Adjusts the density and the background color of originals. (See Adjusting Density, on p. 5-51.) : Adjusts the image quality of originals. (See Selecting Image Quality, on p. 5-54.) <2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans two- sided originals for sending. (See 2-Sided Original, on p. 5-56.) : Sends scanned documents at a specified time. (See Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending), on p. 5-58.) : Sends each page of the document to the destination as it is scanned. (See Direct Sending, on p. 5-61.) : Stores frequently used send settings for future use. (See Favorites, on p. 5-63.)

8 Press (Start)

Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].

10 Press (Start).

Scanning starts. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

Fax

5-19

Sending Fax Documents

Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual Sending)

Use manual sending when you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document, or if the recipient does not have a fax machine that can receive automatically.

You cannot use group addresses for manual sending.

1 Connect an external telephone to the machine if you want to talk to the recipient before sending a document. For information on how to connect an external telephone to the machine, see Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual.

2 Place your originals.

You can only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass.

11 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.

12 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select .

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.

Fax

5-20

Sending Fax Documents

3 Press (Main Menu).

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Press the left Any key to select or pick up the handset of your external telephone.

7 Dial the recipients fax number. You can enter up to 40 characters for the fax number. Make sure to confirm the dial tone before entering a fax number. If you enter the number before the dial tone can be heard, the call may not connect, or the wrong number may be dialed.

8 Talk through the handset to the recipient. If you select in step 6, you can pick up the handset when you hear the recipients voice. If you hear a high-pitched signal instead of the recipients voice, go to step 10.

9 Ask the recipient to set their fax machine to receive faxes.

10 When you hear a high-pitched signal, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK] before hanging up the handset.

Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select .

Fax

5-21

Sending Fax Documents

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Press the left Any key to select .

5 Enter the number of the fax information service using (numeric keys).

If you are using one-touch: Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK].

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired one-touch, then press the right Any key to select .

Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing

If your machine is set for pulse dialing, use the procedure below to switch to tone dialing to use information services (e.g., banks, airline reservations, and hotel reservations).

To talk to the other party, you will need to connect an external telephone to the machine.

Fax

5-22

Sending Fax Documents

6 When the recorded message of the information service answers, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select to switch to tone dialing, then press [OK].

If you are already using this machine with tone dialing, this step is not necessary. After you press , appears on the display.

7 Enter the numbers requested by the information service using (numeric keys).

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK] if you require a faxed copy of the information.

If you do not require a faxed copy of the information, press the right Any key to select .

Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses)

When you dial or register an overseas number, you may need to insert a pause within the number.

1 Place your originals. 2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-23

Sending Fax Documents

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Enter the international access code using (numeric keys).

6 If necessary, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

You can enter successive pauses within the fax number to make the pause time longer. You can change the length of a pause inserted within the fax number in . The default setting is two second. (See Adjusting the Pause Time, on p. 5-78.)

7 Enter the country code, the area code, and the fax number of the recipient.

8 If necessary, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Pauses entered at the end of fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.

9 Press (Start).

Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select .

Fax

5-24

Sending Fax Documents

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].

11 Press (Start).

Scanning starts. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

12 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.

13 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select .

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.

Fax

5-25

Sending Fax Documents

1 Place your originals.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use the software keyboard to enter the I- fax address, then press the right Any key to select .

You can enter up to 120 characters for the I- fax address. For information on using the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

Basic Methods for Sending I-Faxes

This section describes the flow of sending I-faxes.

The following conditions are always selected: Paper Size: LTR

This is because the sender does not know whether the recipients machine can receive sizes other than LTR. Originals larger than LTR are reduced to LTR size.

File Format: TIFF Resolution: B&W 200 100 dpi or B&W 200 200 dpi

For details on the I-fax functions, see Fax, in the e-Manual.

Fax

5-26

Sending Fax Documents

6 Make the scan settings you require.

You can specify the following settings: : Sets or .* : Adjusts the resolution of originals. (See Fax, in the e-Manual.) : Adjusts the density and the background color of originals. (See Fax, in the e-Manual.) : Adjusts the image quality of originals. (See Fax, in the e-Manual.) <2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans two- sided originals for sending. (See Fax, in the e-Manual.) : Sends scanned documents at a specified time. (See Fax, in the e-Manual.) : Sets the documents name. (See Fax, in the e-Manual.) : Sets the subject line and message body text. (See Fax, in the e-Manual.) : Sets the reply-to address. (See Fax, in the e-Manual.) : Stores frequently used send settings for future use. (See Fax, in the e-Manual.)

* If you want to divide multiple images into single pages and send each page as a separate file, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Press (Start).

Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].

9 Press (Start).

Scanning starts. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

Fax

5-27

Sending Fax Documents

10 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.

11 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select .

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.

Basic Methods for Sending PC Faxes

This section describes the flow of sending PC faxes.

Faxing methods may differ depending on the application you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application software. For details on the PC fax functions, see Fax, in the e-Manual.

1 Open the document you want to fax from the application.

2 Select [Print] from the [File] menu.

The procedure for displaying the [Print] dialog box may differ depending on the application you are using.

3 Select your fax from [Name], then click [Properties].

The fax name displayed in the fax driver screen is changed by settings in the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]). (See Fax, in the e-Manual.) The procedure for displaying the fax driver screen may differ depending on the applications you are using.

4 Configure the required settings in the fax driver screen, then click [OK].

5 Click [Print].

Fax

5-28

Sending Fax Documents

6 Specify recipient name and fax number in the [Sending Settings] sheet click [Add to Destinations List].

The number of recipients to which you can send simultaneously depends on the conditions of cover sheet attachment. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom right- hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help. You can select a recipient from the address book by clicking [Address Book]. (See Fax, in the e-Manual.) You can use or edit the address book only if you are permitted access to the folder where the address book file is saved (by default, Power Users and higher have access to the folder). If you are not permitted access to the folder, log on as a user who has access to the folder, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and save the address book file in a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission. (See Fax, in the e-Manual.) When you click [Add to Destination List], a dialog box to prompt you to confirm the destination appears, if the Security Settings in the [Special] page is enabled. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom right- hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.

7 If you want to attach a cover sheet, select [Cover Sheet] sheet specify a format for the cover sheet. See Fax, in the e-Manual for cover sheet attachment.

8 Click [OK].

Fax

5-29

Canceling Sending Fax Documents

Canceling Sending Fax Documents

Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.

1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel) during transmission.

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to cancel, then press the right Any key to select .

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-30

Specifying Destinations

Specifying Destinations

This section describes how to specify a fax destination. You can select a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch, or specify a new destination.

If in in under is set to , you can only specify a destination using

, , or . If you select , you can select only settings stored. (See Security, in the e-Manual.) The destination that you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted once the document is sent. If you frequently send documents to the same destinations, store these destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book, on p. 3-2.) Specifying a New Fax Number You can specify a new fax number using , and (numeric keys). For details on how to send the documents, see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes, on p. 5-17. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 3 Use [] , [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-31

Specifying Destinations

4 Enter a fax number using , and (numeric keys).

You can enter up to 40 characters for the fax number. Details of each item are shown below.

: Set the desired destination. : Delete the last number entered. : Insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number you are dialing. If you insert a pause within the fax number, the letter

is displayed between the numbers. If you insert a pause at the end of the fax number, the letter

appears. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code and at the end of the fax number. (See Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses), on p. 5-22.) : Select when you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange), which accepts only tone signals. If you select and press [OK], the letter appears. : Send documents directly to the recipient. Select , then press [OK]. If you do not select direct sending mode, memory sending mode is used. (See Direct Sending, on p. 5-61.) : Send a fax document manually or use tone dialing. (See Calling the Recipient before Sending Fax Documents (Manual Sending), on p. 5-19, or Switching Temporarily to Tone Dialing, on p. 5-21.)

You cannot insert a pause at the beginning of a number. If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long. You can press (Clear) to clear your entry. If in in under is set to , you should enter the fax number again for confirmation. Enter the fax number you entered in step 4, then press [OK]. (See Security, in the e-Manual.)

5 Use [] , [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If you want to clear the specified destination:

Press the left Any key to select .

Fax

5-32

Specifying Destinations

Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select .

Specify a destination again.

If you want to confirm/edit the specified destination:

Press the left Any key to select .

Check if the destination you want to confirm or edit is selected, then press [OK].

Confirm the specified destination.

To complete this procedure, press the right Any key to select . To edit the specified destination, press [OK], then edit the destination.

If you want to register the specified destination in the Address Book:

For the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you cannot register the destination in the following procedures.

Press the left Any key to select .

Check if the destination you want to register is selected, then press [OK].

Fax

5-33

Specifying Destinations

Press the left Any key to select .

Register the specified destination.

For details on how to register the destination in the Address Book, see Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book, on p. 3-2.

Fax

5-34

Specifying Destinations

Using the Address Book

You must specify the destination to send documents. A maximum of 300 (200 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations (including 200 one-touch destinations) can be stored. If you store addresses in the Address Book, you can easily select them.

To use this feature, you must first register destinations in the Address Book. (See Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book, on p. 3-2.) If you use the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you can register only one-touch destinations in the Address Book. Address Books can be saved, imported, and transferred using the Remote User Interface. (See Settings from a PC, in the e-Manual.) For details on how to send the documents, see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes, on p. 5-17.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination, then press [OK]. The icons displayed on the Address Book are: : Fax : E-mail : I-Fax : File Server : Group You can select multiple destinations at a time. You can use [], [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations. If the register name is longer than 10 characters, the first 10 characters are displayed in the name column in the Address Book. If the registered destination name is longer than 13 characters, the first 13 characters are displayed in the destination column in the Address Book. To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.

Fax

5-35

Specifying Destinations

5 Press the right Any key to select .

If you want to clear the specified destination:

Press the left Any key to select .

Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select .

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.

Specify a destination again.

Fax

5-36

Specifying Destinations

Using the One-Touch

You can specify up to 200 destinations in one-touch. Follow the procedure below to start a transmission and send a document using one-touch.

To use this feature, you must first register destinations in one-touch. (See Registering Fax Numbers in One-Touch, on p. 3-32.) If you use the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn, you can register only one-touch destinations in the Address Book. For details on how to send the documents, see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes, on p. 5-17.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Press the right Any key to select .

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination, then press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.

5 Press the right Any key to select .

Fax

5-37

Specifying Destinations

If you want to clear the specified destination:

Press the left Any key to select .

Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select .

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.

Specify a destination again.

Fax

5-38

Specifying Destinations

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select

, then press [OK]. 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired group which is made up of several destinations, then press [OK]. You can select multiple destinations at a time. You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations. To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark. 5 Press the right Any key to select . Using the Group Addresses Group address enables you to specify a group of registered destinations in the Address Book or one-touch. This is useful if you want to send the same document to several destinations. You can register up to 299 (199 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations in one group. You can use the group address from the Address Book or from the one-touch. For details on how to send the documents, see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes, on p. 5-17. Specfyng a Group from the Address Book

Fax

5-39

Specifying Destinations

If you want to clear the specified destination:

Press the left Any key to select .

Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select .

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.

Specify a destination again.

Specfyng a Group from the One-Touch

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Press the right Any key to select .

Fax

5-40

Specifying Destinations

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired group which is made up of several destinations, then press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations at a time.

To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.

5 Press the right Any key to select .

If you want to clear the specified destination:

Press the left Any key to select .

Check if the destination you want to clear is selected, then press the left Any key to select .

If multiple destinations are specified, clear the other destinations as necessary.

Specify a destination again.

Fax

5-41

Specifying Destinations

1 Place your originals.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Specify a destination.

For details about how to specify destinations, see Specifying Destinations, on p. 5-30.

5 Press the right Any key to select .

Sending Originals to More Than One Location (Broadcasting)

Broadcasting enables you to send the same document to multiple recipients.

A maximum of 332 (232 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 332 or 232 destinations, 32 new destinations can be specified.) If you specify a group of several destinations, each destination is counted as a separate address. If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations, it is recommended that you store those destinations as a group. When is set to , you cannot send the documents to multiple recipients. (See Security, in the e-Manual.) You cannot cancel to send only one destination out of the multiple destinations. If you specify e-mail or file server addresses as destinations, appears on the Send Settings screen. However, this setting is disabled when sending faxes.

Fax

5-42

Specifying Destinations

6 Repeat step 4 and 5 until all the destinations are set.

Up to 32 new destinations can be specified. If you add destinations, specify them from Address Book. You cannot specify the detail settings for each destination.

7 Press (Start).

Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].

9 Press (Start).

Scanning starts. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

10 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.

11 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select .

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.

Fax

5-43

Specifying Destinations

Specifying Fax Numbers via an LDAP Server

You can specify e-mail addresses and fax numbers by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers. E-mail addresses and fax numbers obtained via the server can be specified as destinations or stored in the Address Book. This section describes how to specify fax numbers via an LDAP server.

If is set to , some characters are restricted and cannot be entered. To enter all characters, set to . (See Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual.) You may have to set up the LDAP servers beforehand, depending on the network environment. If you want to specify or register destinations via an LDAP server, the LDAP server settings must be specified in the machine beforehand. (See Network Settings, in the e-Manual.) For information on how to specify e-mail addresses via an LDAP server, see E-mail, in the e-Manual. For details on how to send the documents, see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes, on p. 5-17.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired server to search, then press [OK].

Fax

5-44

Specifying Destinations

5 Specify the search criteria. There are two methods to search for a fax number: Simple Search and Detailed Search. Simple Search enables you to search for a fax number by entering the name, e-mail address, or fax number for the destination. To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, use Detailed Search. If a destination has both a registered e-mail address and fax number, you can search for it by entering either the e-mail address or the fax number as the search criterion.

To use Simple Search:

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , , or , then press [OK].

Use the software keyboard to enter the name, e-mail address, or fax number, then press the right Any key to select .

The search criteria boxes that are not filled out, are not searched. For information on using the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, press the left Any key to select , and follow the directions below. The search criteria you entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed Search.

To use Detailed Search:

Press the left Any key to select .

Press the left Any key to select

. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-45

Specifying Destinations

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the first item, then press [OK].

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired search category, then press [OK].

: Search by name. : Search by e-mail address. : Search by fax number. : Search by organization name. : Search by organization unit (e.g., departments in an organization).

For example, if cn(common name)=user1, ou(organization unit)=salesdept, o(organization)=canon, c(country)=jp is the distinguished name in the directory, enter / of the user as follows:

=canon

=salesdept

/ can be used as search categories only if the information has been registered on the LDAP Server. Detailed Search by / may not be performed, depending on whether the attribute types have been registered on the LDAP server and depending on the type of application on the server. You can also add additional user-defined search attributes. For instructions on how to register or edit a search attribute, see Network Settings, in the e-Manual.

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the second item, then press [OK].

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired search condition, then press [OK].

: The result must contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit. : The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.

Fax

5-46

Specifying Destinations

: The result must be exactly the same as the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit. : The result must be different from the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit. : The result must begin with the same first few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit. : The result must end with the same last few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the third item, then press [OK].

Use the software keyboard to enter the search criterion, then press the right Any key to select .

For information on using the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

Press the right Any key to select .

6 Add or edit the search criteria as necessary. If you search for a fax number using the criteria specified in step 5, go to the next step.

To continue adding more search criteria:

Press the left Any key to select

. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-47

Specifying Destinations

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

: The machine searches and returns a result that matches any of the specified search criteria. : The machine searches and returns a result that matches all of the specified search criteria.

Press the left Any key to select

. Use[], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow step 5 to add the search criteria. You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time. If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both and together. To edit the search criteria: Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the search criterion that you want to edit, then press the left Any key to select . Use[], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Follow step 5 to edit the search criteria.

Fax

5-48

Specifying Destinations

To delete the search criteria:

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the search criterion that you want to delete, then press the left Any key to select

. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 7 Press the right Any key to select . To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press the left Any key to select . If the machine finds some results before you select , these search results are displayed. Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the time settings on the server and the machine. The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in in . (See Network Settings, in the e-Manual.) If the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of addresses to search, or change the search criteria. If you select without specifying any search criteria, all of the addresses stored on the LDAP server are displayed. If the Network Password Entry screen is displayed, enter your user name and network password, then press [OK]. The Network Password Entry screen is displayed if either one of the following is true: If in in is set to or , and is set to . (See Network Settings, in the e-Manual.) If the user name, password, and domain name specified in in are incorrect. (See Network Settings, in the e-Manual.)

Fax

5-49

Specifying Destinations

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired destination from the search results, then press [OK].

You can select up to 32 destinations.

To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again, then press [OK] to clear the check mark. You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations.

9 Press the right Any key to select .

Fax

5-50

Selecting Resolution

Selecting Resolution

You can specify the resolution before scanning the original. The default setting is <200 200 dpi (Fine)>.

The maximum size of an image that you can send at a resolution of 400 x 400 dpi is LGL. For details on how to send the documents, see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes, on p. 5-17.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Specify a destination.

For details about how to specify destinations, see Specifying Destinations, on p. 5-30.

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired resolution, then press [OK].

Fax

5-51

Adjusting Density

Adjusting Density

You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the original manually.

Manual Exposure Adjustment

You can manually adjust the scan exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.

For details on how to send the documents, see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes, on p. 5-17.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Specify a destination.

For details about how to specify destinations, see Specifying Destinations, on p. 5-30.

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the density, then press [OK].

Move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter or move it to the right to make the exposure darker.

Fax

5-52

Adjusting Density

Adjusting Base Color

This mode enables you to erase the background color of the original when scanning. This mode is especially useful for scanning originals such as catalogs and paper, that have turned yellow from age.

For details on how to send the documents, see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes, on p. 5-17.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Specify a destination.

For details about how to specify destinations, see Specifying Destinations, on p. 5-30.

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Press the right Any key to select .

Fax

5-53

Adjusting Density

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select background setting, then press [OK].

: Does not erase the background color of the original. : If you want to erase the background color of the original, following step is not necessary. : If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color, go to the next step.

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired color, then press [OK].

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to adjust the strength of the color, then press [OK].

If you adjust the strength of , the levels of and adjust automatically to the same level as . If you adjust the strength of or , the level returns to its default level.

9 Press the right Any key to select .

Fax

5-54

Selecting Image Quality

Selecting Image Quality

You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you are scanning. The default setting is .

Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled. If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the mode, the moir effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moir effect by using the sharpness mode. (See Adjusting Sharpness, on p. 5-92.) If the original is a transparency, select the original type and adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original. For details on how to send the documents, see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes, on p. 5-17.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Specify a destination.

For details about how to specify destinations, see Specifying Destinations, on p. 5-30.

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

Fax

5-55

Selecting Image Quality

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the image quality, then press [OK].

: This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos such as magazines or catalogs. : This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn originals can also be scanned clearly. : This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper or photo originals containing halftones (e.g. printed photos).

Fax

5-56

2-Sided Original

2-Sided Original

You can set the machine to automatically turn over 2-sided originals that are placed in the feeder, and scan each side separately. The default setting is .

The 2-sided original mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the direct sending or manual sending mode. When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as LTRR, make sure to place them horizontally into the feeder. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of these originals are scanned upside down. For details on how to send the documents, see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes, on p. 5-17.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Specify a destination.

For details about how to specify destinations, see Specifying Destinations, on p. 5-30.

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display <2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>, then press [OK].

If or has been selected, <2-Sided Originals Settings> is displayed.

Fax

5-57

2-Sided Original

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the type of original, then press [OK].

: 1-sided originals are scanned. : The front and back sides of the original have the same top- bottom orientation. : The front and back sides of the original have opposite top- bottom orientations.

Fax

5-58

Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending)

Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending)

The delayed sending mode enables you to store a send job in memory, and have it sent at a later time. The default setting is .

You can reserve up to 70 jobs for the delayed sending. However, the actual number of jobs that can be reserved may be less than 70, depending on the following conditions:

If multiple documents are being sent at the same time. If large documents are being sent. If there are jobs other than delayed sending.

Once the delayed documents are sent, the documents are automatically deleted from memory. You can check the status or cancel the transmission of jobs for which a preset send time has been specified. (See Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents, on p. 5-147.)

1 Place your originals.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Specify a destination.

For details about how to specify destinations, see Specifying Destinations, on p. 5-30.

Fax

5-59

Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending)

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

6 Enter the send time using (numeric keys), then press [OK].

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24- hour notation. Examples: 3:50 p.m.1550 To cancel to enter the time, press the left Any key to select to return to the previous screen.

If you set a time earlier than the current time, the document will be sent at that time on the next day. If you make a mistake when entering the send time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four-digit number.

7 Press (Start).

Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder. The scanned data is stored in memory and sent to the specified destination at the specified send time. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].

9 Press (Start).

Scanning starts. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

Fax

5-60

Sending Originals at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending)

10 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.

11 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select .

The scanned data is stored in memory and sent to the specified destination at the specified send time.

Fax

5-61

Direct Sending

Direct Sending

The machine sends each page of the document to the destination as it is scanned. The default setting is .

If you do not select direct sending mode, memory sending mode is used. With direct sending mode, you can send a document of two or more pages only when using the feeder. You can only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass. You can specify only one destination at a time for direct sending mode. Memory sending is automatically set when using delayed sending or when multiple destinations are specified. If an error occurs or you cancel transmission in the direct sending mode, you can check how many pages have been sent to the destination by printing the Activity Report, the Fax Activity Report, or on the for fax on the System Monitor screen.

1 Place your originals.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Specify a destination.

For details about how to specify destinations, see Specifying Destinations, on p. 5-30.

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

Fax

5-62

Direct Sending

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

: Send after all pages are scanned. : Send each page as it is scanned.

7 Press (Start).

Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].

9 Press (Start).

Scanning starts. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

You can only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass.

Fax

5-63

Favorites

Favorites

You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them as favorites in memory. You can register up to 9 favorites. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.

The send settings registered as favorites in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned OFF. If an address included in a favorites is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the settings registered in the favorites. For details on how to send the documents, see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes, on p. 5-17.

Registering Favorites

You can register names for favorites from the Select Send Type Screen or register settings for favorites from the Send Settings screen.

The currently specified settings are registered for the favorites.

Regsterng Names for Favortes from the Select Send Type Screen

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Press the left Any key to select .

Fax

5-64

Favorites

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to register, then press the right Any key to select .

You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select

. Press the right Any key to select to return to the previous screen. 5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 6 Use the software keyboard to enter a name for favorites, then press the right Any key to select . You can enter up to 16 characters for the name. If you press without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default: M1 to M9). For information on using the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

Fax

5-65

Favorites

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Specify a destination.

For details about how to specify destinations, see Specifying Destinations, on p. 5-30.

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

The currently specified settings are registered for the favorites.

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to register, then press the right Any key to select .

You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select

. Press the right Any key to select to return to the previous screen. Regsterng Favortes from the Send Settngs Screen

Fax

5-66

Favorites

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or or

, then press [OK]. To store the current settings, select . To cancel storing the settings, select . If you select a key that has settings stored, select to overwrite the previous settings. You can check detail settings to select . 8 Press the right Any key to select . 9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 10 Use the software keyboard to enter a name for favorites, then press the right Any key to select . You can enter up to 16 characters for the name. If you press without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default: M1 to M9). For information on using the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

Fax

5-67

Favorites

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel)) to select , then press [OK].

3 Press the left Any key to select .

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to erase, then press the right Any key to select .

You can only erase a key that has settings stored in the favorites. You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select

. Press the right Any key to select to return to the previous screen. Erasing Favorites You can erase the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen. Erasng Favortes from the Select Send Type Screen

Fax

5-68

Favorites

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Specify a destination.

For details about how to specify destinations, see Specifying Destinations, on p. 5-30.

Erasng Favortes from the Send Settngs Screen

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel)) to select , then press [OK].

Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Key names are not erased. You can change the name in .

Fax

5-69

Favorites

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to erase, then press the right Any key to select .

You can only erase a key with settings stored in the favorites. You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select

. Press the right Any key to select to return to the previous screen. 6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them. 7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Key names are not erased. You can change the name in .

Fax

5-70

Favorites

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Press the left Any key to select .

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to recall, then press [OK].

If you select favorites that already has specified destinations, the Send Settings screen appears. You can change the send settings or add destinations at this time.

You can also check the settings stored in the favorites by pressing the left Any key to select

. If you select favorites that has no specified destinations, the Select Send Type screen appears. You can specify destinations. To cancel all settings and return to the Select Send Type screen, press (Reset). Using the Favorites If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document. You can recall the settings from the Select Send Type screen. To use this feature, you must first register the desired settings in favorites. (See Registering Favorites, on p. 5-63.) For details on how to send the documents, see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes, on p. 5-17.

Fax

5-71

Favorites

Checking Settings for Recalled Favorites

This mode enables you to check detail settings for favorites. You can check the settings from the Select Send Type screen or from the Send Settings screen.

To use this feature, you must first register the desired document settings and destinations in favorites. (See Registering Favorites, on p. 5-63.) For details on how to send the documents, see Basic Methods for Sending Faxes, on p. 5-17.

Checkng Favortes from the Select Send Type Screen

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Press the left Any key to select .

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to check, then press the left Any key to select

. You can check detail settings. Press the right Any key to select to return to the previous screen.

Fax

5-72

Favorites

Checkng Favortes from the Send Settngs Screen

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Specify a destination.

For details about how to specify destinations, see Specifying Destinations, on p. 5-30.

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to display , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the favorites you want to check, then press the left Any key to select

. You can check detail settings. Press the right Any key to select to return to the previous screen.

Fax

5-73

Job Recall

Job Recall

You can recall the last three addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set in the , and then send your documents.

The settings such as destinations, scan settings and send settings are stored in a log. The actions below after you change settings are not recorded in a log:

Pressing the (Start) or (Reset) or (Main Menu). Activation of the Auto Clear mode. Turning OFF the machine.

Identical send settings are stored only once in recall memory. If in in under is set to , the addresses specified from the Address Book are only recalled. The settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the main power is turned OFF. If in in under is set to , you cannot specify a destination using the . (See Security, in the e-Manual.)

1 Place your originals.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , or , then press [OK].

You can check the recall settings by pressing the left Any key to select

.

Fax

5-74

Job Recall

If you select a log in which a destination is stored:

The Send Settings screen appears.

Confirm the settings.

If you select a log in which a destination is not stored:

The Select Send Type screen appears.

Specify a destination.

For details about how to specify destinations, see Specifying Destinations, on p. 5-30.

6 Press (Start).

Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].

8 Press (Start).

Scanning starts. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

Fax

5-75

Job Recall

9 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.

10 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select .

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.

Fax

5-76

ECM Transmission

ECM Transmission

ECM (Error Correction Mode) is a mode that automatically detects and corrects fax transmission errors resulting from telephone line noise. ECM reduces errors when sending faxes in a poor telephone line condition. The default setting is .

To communicate using ECM, make sure this mode is activated in both the sending and receiving machines. ECM transmissions are possible only when this mode is activated in both machines. Even when ECM is activated, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection. If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to send the documents.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-77

ECM Transmission

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

: Does not use ECM. : Uses ECM.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-78

Adjusting the Pause Time

Adjusting the Pause Time

Some overseas dialing may be affected by the distance or complex routing of connections when dialing the international access code, country code, and the destinations telephone number all at once. In such cases, insert a pause after the international access code. When the machine dials the number, it will pause where the pause was inserted in the number. This helps to improve the connection. The default setting is <2 Seconds>.

You can insert a pause on the screen where you specify the fax number. (See Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses), on p. 5-22.) Pauses entered at the end of dialed fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-79

Adjusting the Pause Time

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the pause time, then press [OK].

You can also use (numeric keys) to set the pause time.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-80

Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial)

Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial)

Auto Redial enables the machine to automatically redial the recipients fax number if the recipient cannot be reached due to a busy line, or if a sending error occurs. Auto Redial can be turned on or off. If you set Auto Redial to on, you can set how many times the machine redials, the redial interval, and whether the document should be resent due to an error.

The default settings are as follows:

: On : 2 Times : 2 Minutes : All Pages

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-81

Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial)

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

: Does not redial automatically when a transmission fails. If you select and press [OK], go to step 15. : Redials automatically when a transmission fails. If you select and press [OK], press [OK] again, then go to the next step.

8 Press the right Any key to select .

9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the number of redial times, then press [OK].

You can also use (numeric keys) to set the number of redial times.

Fax

5-82

Redialing Automatically When the Line Is Busy (Auto Redial)

11 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

12 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the redial interval, then press [OK].

You can also use (numeric keys) to set the redial interval.

13 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

14 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , , or , then press [OK].

: Redialing does not take place if a sending error occurs. : Auto Redial takes place if a sending error occurs. All pages of the document are resent. : Auto Redial takes place if a sending error occurs. The first page of the document, the error page, and all subsequent pages are resent.

15 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-83

Checking the Dial Tone before Sending

Checking the Dial Tone before Sending

The following redirection problem may happen with certain kinds of fax machines on the market made by companies other than Canon. The Check Tone Before Sending mode prevents this rare occurrence from happening. If you are sending a fax document from your machine at the same time another fax machine (made by a company other than Canon) is trying to send you a fax, your fax document may end up being redirected to that fax machine, instead of the original destination you had intended. Setting to enables you to avoid such sending problems. The default setting is .

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-84

Checking the Dial Tone before Sending

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-85

Standard Send Settings

Standard Send Settings

This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the send function.

Storing the Standard Send Settings

You can store the standard send settings.

The default settings are as follows: : 200 200 dpi : 0 : Text <2-Sided Originals Settings>: Off

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-86

Standard Send Settings

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting item, then press [OK].

You can specify the following settings: : Adjusts the resolution of originals. (See Selecting Resolution, on p. 5-50.) : Adjusts the density and the background color of originals. (See Adjusting Density, on p. 5-51.) : Adjusts the image quality of originals. (See Selecting Image Quality, on p. 5-54.) <2-Sided Originals Settings>: Scans two-sided originals for sending. (See 2-Sided Original, on p. 5-56.)

You do not need to specify . This setting is disabled when sending faxes.

9 Press the right Any key to select .

10 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-87

Standard Send Settings

Restoring the Standard Send Settings to Their Default

You can restore the standard send settings to their default settings.

All settings including are restored to their default settings.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-88

Standard Send Settings

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-89

Printing the TX Terminal ID

Printing the TX Terminal ID

The TX Terminal ID setting enables you to specify whether the Terminal ID information is printed at the top of every document that you send via fax. Information such as your fax number and name is printed, enabling the recipient to know who sent the document.

The default settings are as follows:

: On : Outside : FAX

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-90

Printing the TX Terminal ID

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press the right Any key to select .

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

: The Terminal ID information is printed inside the image area on the recipients paper. : The Terminal ID information is printed outside the image area on the recipients paper.

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-91

Printing the TX Terminal ID

12 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

: FAX is printed before the fax number. : TEL is printed before the telephone number.

13 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-92

Adjusting Sharpness

Adjusting Sharpness

This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast. The default setting is <0>.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-93

Adjusting Sharpness

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to slide the indicator towards or , then press [OK].

: To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones, the setting should be towards . This setting lessens the moir effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern). : To scan text or lines clearly, the setting should be towards . This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-94

Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation

Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation

This mode enables you to specify what screen is displayed for a send operation. When you select on the Main Menu screen and press [OK], the screen specified here is displayed for a send operation. The default setting is .

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-95

Specifying What to Display on the Screen for a Send Operation

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the initial screen, then press [OK].

: The Set Favorites screen is displayed on the initial Send screen. : The One-touch Selection/Clear screen is displayed on the initial Send screen. : The Select Send Type screen is displayed on the initial Send screen.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-96

Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default

Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default

You can restore almost all of the Send Function Settings to their default settings.

You cannot initialize and . ( is disabled for the fax functions.)

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-97

Restoring the Send Function Settings to Their Default

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-98

Send Start Speed

Send Start Speed

This function enables you to change the send start speeds, which is useful when there is difficulty initiating the sending of a document. The default setting is <33600 bps>.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using (numeric keys), then press

(Log In/Out).

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-99

Send Start Speed

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired start speed, then press [OK].

If your document transmission is slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select <33600 bps>, <14400 bps>, <9600 bps>, <7200 bps>, <4800 bps>, or <2400 bps>.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-100

Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper

You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to save paper. The default setting is .

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select <2-Sided Print>, then press [OK].

Fax

5-101

Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-102

Reducing a Received Document

Reducing a Received Document

You can set the machine to automatically reduce received documents so that the whole document is printed within the printable area of the paper.

The default settings are as follows:

: On : Auto : 90% : Vertical Only

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-103

Reducing a Received Document

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or .

: Does not reduce received documents. If you select , press [OK], then go to step 14. : Reduces received documents. If you select , press the right Any key to select , then go to the next step.

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or .

: The image is automatically reduced by a suitable reduction ratio. If you select , press [OK], then go to step 12. : The image is reduced by the reduction ratio set for in the next step. If you select , press [OK], then go to the next step.

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

11 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the reduction ratio, then press [OK].

Fax

5-104

Reducing a Received Document

12 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

13 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

: The image is reduced in both the vertical and horizontal directions. : The image is reduced in the vertical direction only.

14 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-105

Printing Footer Information on a Received Document

Printing Footer Information on a Received Document

You can set whether the machine prints the date, day, and time received, transaction number, and page number at the bottom of the received document. The default setting is .

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-106

Printing Footer Information on a Received Document

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-107

Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low

Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low

This function enables you to continue printing your current jobs when the toner is low. The default setting is .

When is set to , the printed documents may be light or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased when the documents are printed out, so you cannot print the same documents again.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-108

Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-109

ECM Reception

ECM Reception

ECM (Error Correction Mode) is a mode that automatically detects and corrects fax transmission errors resulting from telephone line noise. ECM reduces errors when receiving faxes in a poor telephone line condition. The default setting is .

To communicate using ECM, make sure this mode is activated in both the sending and receiving machines. ECM transmissions are possible only when this mode is activated in both machines. Even when ECM is activated, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection. If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to receive the documents.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-110

ECM Reception

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-111

Setting the Incoming Ring Tone

Setting the Incoming Ring Tone

This function enables you to activate the ring alert of the external telephone when the machine receives a fax or telephone call in the Auto RX or Fax/Tel Auto Switch mode.

The default settings are as follows:

: On : 2 Times

Incoming calls or outgoing calls may not work properly, depending on the type of the external telephone connected to the machine.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-112

Setting the Incoming Ring Tone

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or .

: Incoming tone does not ring. If you select , press [OK], then go to step 9. : Incoming tone rings. If you select , press [OK], then go to the next step.

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the number of ring times, then press [OK].

You can also use (numeric keys) to set the number of ring times.

9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-113

Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote Reception)

Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote Reception)

You can connect one external telephone to the machine. When the telephone rings with the machine in the Manual RX mode, you can use the external telephone to start receiving the document without walking over to the machine.

Activating the Remote Reception

Follow this procedure to turn on the remote reception.

The default settings are as follows: : On : 25

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-114

Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote Reception)

Receiving Documents with the Remote Reception

Follow this procedure to receive fax documents using the remote reception.

Before using the remote reception to receive fax documents, make sure the followings: An external telephone is connected properly. Your telephone is set to tone dialing.

1 When you receive a call, pick up the external telephone.

2 When you hear a beep, use the numeric keys to enter the two-digit remote reception ID to start reception. If you hear someone on the line, you can start talking to the other party.

3 When the reception is complete, hang up the telephone.

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to enter a remote reception ID (a combination of two characters using 0 to 9), then press [OK].

You can also use (numeric keys) to enter a remote reception ID. The default ID is 25. If you do not want to change the ID, press [OK] without entering any numbers.

9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-115

Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode

Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode

This function enables you to set the machine to switch to document receive mode after ringing for a specified length of time in the Manual RX mode. The default setting is .

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-116

Adjusting the Auto Switch Time for the Manual RX Mode

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to set the amount of time the machine waits before automatically switching to the document receive mode, then press [OK].

You can also use (numeric keys) to set the time.

9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-117

Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders

Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders

This function enables you to reject incoming faxes from senders who do not transmit their fax numbers (telephone numbers) to your machine. This can be useful when you do not want to receive direct mail (DM). The default setting is .

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-118

Rejecting Incoming Faxes from the Unidentified Senders

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

: Does not reject to receive faxes from unknown senders. : Rejects to receive faxes from unknown senders.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-119

Receive Start Speed

Receive Start Speed

This function enables you to change the receive start speeds, which is useful when there is difficulty initiating the receiving of a document. The default setting is <33600 bps>.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using (numeric keys), then press

(Log In/Out).

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-120

Receive Start Speed

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired start speed, then press [OK].

If your document reception is slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select <33600 bps>, <14400 bps>, <9600 bps>, <7200 bps>, <4800 bps>, or <2400 bps>.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-121

Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)

Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)

Normally a document prints as soon as you receive it. However, there may be occasions when you want the machine to store all documents in memory until you are ready to print them. Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called memory lock reception. The default setting is .

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using (numeric keys), then press

(Log In/Out).

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If the Memory Lock Password has been set, enter the Memory Lock Password using (numeric keys), then press [OK].

Fax

5-122

Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or .

: Does not use the memory lock reception mode. If you select , press [OK], then go to step 12. : Uses the memory lock reception mode. If you select , press the right Any key to select , then go to the next step.

7 If you want to set or change a password for the Memory Lock mode, enter a password (up to seven digits) using

(numeric keys), then press [OK].

If you set a password, it will be necessary to enter the password whenever you want to change the Memory Lock mode settings, or cancel the Memory Lock mode. If you do not want to set the Memory Lock with a password, press [OK] without entering any numbers.

You cannot store a password that only consists of zeros, such as <0000000>. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros. Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored. If you make a mistake when entering the password, press (Clear), then enter the correct password.

8 Set the machine to print an RX report or not.

If you want to print an RX report when receiving documents, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If you do not want to print an RX report, select , then press [OK].

If you want to print an RX report, you need also to set to . (See Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual.)

Fax

5-123

Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)

9 Set the time for the machine to enter and leave the Memory Lock mode.

If you want to specify the Memory Lock Time settings, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If you do not want to specify the Memory Lock Time settings, select , select , then press [OK]. Go to step 12. If is selected, the Memory Lock mode will not start automatically at a specified time. The machine enters the Memory Lock mode only when you manually set the Memory Lock mode to in step 6.

10 Specify the time (in 24-hour/military time format) for the machine to enter the Memory Lock mode using (numeric keys), then press [OK].

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four digit number.

11 Specify the time (in 24-hour/military time format) for the machine to leave the Memory Lock mode using (numeric keys), then press [OK].

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry, then enter another four digit number. If you set the same time for Memory Lock Start Time and Memory Lock End Time, the machine will be in the Memory Lock mode through the entire day.

12 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-124

Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode

Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode

Follow this procedure to print documents received when the machine is in the memory lock reception mode.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using (numeric keys), then press

(Log In/Out).

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If the Memory Lock Password has been set, enter the Memory Lock Password using (numeric keys), then press [OK].

Fax

5-125

Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

The received documents are printed.

7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-126

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

This machine enables you to automatically forward received fax documents to a pre- specified destination. You can specify the desired forwarding destination to suit your needs, as shown below.

When you are forwarding the received documents to a specified destination, you can also specify a condition such as Only the fax documents sent from a specific fax number are to be forwarded to sort the received documents automatically.

The maximum number of forwarding settings that you can store is 52 (12 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn): 50 (10 for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn) with forwarding conditions and 2 without conditions. You can set whether to print fax documents with forwarding errors, and whether to store them in memory. (See Handling Forwarding Documents, on p. 5-141.) If a forwarding error occurs when and are set to and is set to , the received documents will be lost.

Fax

5-127

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

Before Specifying the Forwarding Settings

The necessary settings before forwarding received fax documents are as follows.

Fax

5-128

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

Specifying Forwarding Settings

This section describes how to register, erase, print, check, and change the forwarding settings.

Storng Forwardng Settngs

You can register the forwarding conditions and the forwarding destinations. If the machine receives fax documents matching the registered conditions, the documents are automatically sent to the specified destination. You can also specify forwarding destinations for received documents that do not match the forwarding conditions. To be able to forward received documents, you need to specify the forwarding settings in this section, then activate the settings. (See Activating the Registered Forwarding Settings, on p. 5-135.)

Fax

5-129

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using (numeric keys), then press

(Log In/Out).

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Press the left Any key to select

. 6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 7 Use the software keyboard to enter a name for the forwarding condition, then press the right Any key to select . For information on using the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

Fax

5-130

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding condition, then press [OK].

The available forwarding conditions are: : Disregards the Fax Number information as a forwarding condition. : Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not exist. : Forwards the document if the Fax Number information matches all of the characters entered. : Forwards the document if the Fax Number information differs from the characters entered. : Forwards the document if the Fax Number information begins with the characters entered. : Forwards the document if the Fax Number information ends with the characters entered. : Forwards the document if the Fax Number information contains the characters entered. : Forwards the document if the Fax Number information does not contain the characters entered.

If you select or , go to step 11.

10 Enter the forwarding criterion (up to 20 characters) using (numeric keys), then press the right Any key to select .

The following items are also available for entering the forwarding criterion:

: Inserts a space between numbers. <+>: Use to insert a country code. Use <+> after the country code, and before the fax number. : Deletes the last number entered.

11 Press the right Any key to select .

Fax

5-131

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

12 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding destination, then press [OK].

You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time. To forward to multiple destinations, select a group address. You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations. To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See Storing/Editing Address Book, on p. 3-2.) To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.

13 Press the right Any key to select .

14 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file format of the document you want to forward.

: Forwards the file in the TIFF format. : Forwards the file in the PDF format.

This procedure is not necessary if a fax number is specified as the destination in step 12. Go to step 17. To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required. To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.

15 Press the right Any key to select .

Fax

5-132

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

16 If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK] twice.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK] twice.

17 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select .

When Forwardng Destnatons Do Not Match the Forwardng Condtons

You can store the forwarding destinations of a received document if the forwarding settings of the received document are not registered, or if the received document does not match all of the forwarding conditions that you have specified.

Forwarding destinations can be stored one at a time, according to the receive type of the received document. To be able to forward received documents, you need to activate the settings registered here. (See Activating the Registered Forwarding Settings, on p. 5-135.)

Fax

5-133

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using (numeric keys), then press

(Log In/Out).

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Press the left Any key to select

. 6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding destination, then press [OK].

Fax

5-134

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time. To forward to multiple destinations, select a group address. You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations. To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See Storing/Editing Address Book, on p. 3-2.) To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.

9 Press the right Any key to select .

10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file format of the document you want to forward.

: Forwards the file in the TIFF format. : Forwards the file in the PDF format.

This procedure is not necessary if a fax number is specified as the destination in step 8. Go to step 13. To view a TIFF file, a software application that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required. To view a PDF file, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required.

11 Press the right Any key to select .

12 If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK] twice.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK] twice.

13 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-135

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

Actvatng the Regstered Forwardng Settngs

You can set whether received documents are forwarded.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using (numeric keys), then press

(Log In/Out).

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired forwarding setting, then press [OK].

Each time you press [OK], the icon status displayed on the left side of the condition name is switched.

< >: The received document is forwarded to the specified destination if it matches the forwarding conditions. < >: The received document is not forwarded to the specified destination even if it matches the forwarding conditions.

6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-136

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

Erasng Forwardng Settngs

You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using (numeric keys), then press

(Log In/Out).

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding setting you want to erase.

6 Press the left Any key to select

. 7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-137

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK]. 9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the

Main Menu screen.

Prntng Forwardng Settngs

You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using (numeric keys), then press

(Log In/Out).

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-138

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

5 Press the left Any key to select

. 6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK]. 8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. Checkng/Changng Forwardng Settngs You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using (numeric keys), then press (Log In/Out).

Fax

5-139

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the forwarding setting you want to check or change.

6 Press the left Any key to select

. 7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 8 Check or change the forwarding settings. For instructions on changing forwarding settings, see Storing Forwarding Settings, on p. 5-128. 9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-140

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination

You can redirect the fax documents received in memory to the specified destination.

1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to transfer.

5 Press the left Any key to select

. 6 Press the left Any key to select . 7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination, then press the right Any key to select .

Fax

5-141

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed range of destinations. To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See Storing/Editing Address Book, on p. 3-2.) You cannot select a group address.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Handling Forwarding Documents

You can set how the machine handles the documents to be forwarded.

The default settings are as follows: : On : Do Not Store

When and are set to and is set to , the received documents will be lost if a forwarding error occurs. If is set to , forwarded documents or those with forwarding errors are not printed even if is set to or . They are printed when is set to . When is set to or , the first page of a document with forwarding errors will be printed on the Error TX Report if it is set to be printed with image in , even if is set to . For information on Report Settings, see Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual.

1 Press (Main Menu).

2 Press the right Any key to select .

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If the screen appears prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using (numeric keys), then press

(Log In/Out).

Fax

5-142

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , , or , then press [OK].

: Does not print the image. : Prints all the images that has been forwarded. : Prints the image only when forwarding has failed.

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

: Does not store the image. : Stores the image in memory if forwarding fails.

If you set to , you can resend the jobs with forwarding errors to registered destinations in the Address Book. (See Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors, on p. 5-143.)

9 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-143

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to transfer.

5 Press the right Any key to select

. 6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Resending Documents with Forwarding Errors You can resend the fax documents that the machine failed to forward. Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if is set to in in . (See Handling Forwarding Documents, on p. 5-141.)

Fax

5-144

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the destination, then press the right Any key to select . You can use [] or [] to restrict the displayed

range of destinations. To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See Storing/Editing Address Book, on p. 3-2.) If the transfer is successful, the document is erased from memory. You cannot select a group address for transferring the document.

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Checking/Changing the Status of Documents with Forwarding Errors

You can check the details of fax documents that the machine failed to forward. You can also erase and print those documents.

Documents with forwarding errors are stored in memory only if is set to in in . (See Handling Forwarding Documents, on p. 5-141.)

1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-145

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

If you want to check the details of documents with forwarding errors:

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to check.

Press the right Any key to select

. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Check the details of the selected job, then press the right Any key to select . If you want to erase a document with a forwarding error: Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to erase. Press the right Any key to select . Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-146

Forwarding Received Fax Documents to a Computer or Fax Machine

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

To erase multiple documents from memory, select and erase one document at a time.

If you want to print a document with a forwarding error:

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to print.

Press the right Any key to select

. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK]. To print multiple document, select and print one document at a time. 4 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-147

Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory

Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory

The System Monitor screen enables you to view and change the status of fax documents in memory.

Checking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents

You can check the detailed information of fax documents currently being sent or waiting to be sent, then delete unwanted documents as necessary.

1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select

. 5 Check the details of the selected job.

Fax

5-148

Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory

If you want to erase the selected job:

Press the right Any key to select , then go to the next step.

If you complete this procedure:

Go to step 8.

6 Make sure that the job you want to erase is selected, then press the right Any key to select .

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Checking/Deleting Fax Reception Documents

You can check the detailed information of the fax documents currently being received or fax documents that have been received in memory. If the documents are unwanted, you can delete them as necessary. In addition, documents that have been received in memory can be forwarded to a specified destination.

1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel). 2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Fax

5-149

Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select

. 5 Check the details of the selected job. If you want to erase the selected job: Press the right Any key to select , then go to the next step. If you complete this procedure: Go to step 8. You can forward the selected job to another destination by pressing the left Any key to select . For information on forwarding received documents, see Sending Documents in Memory to a Different Destination, on p. 5-140. 6 Make sure that the job you want to erase is selected, then press the right Any key to select . To erase multiple documents from memory, select and erase one document at a time. You cannot erase a document that is being printed. If you select a document that is being received, changes to , enabling you to cancel receiving the document.

Fax

5-150

Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK]. 8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the

Main Menu screen.

Checking/Printing the Fax Log

You can view or print the results of fax transactions that list all faxes sent or received.

1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel).

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If in is set to , is not displayed.

Fax

5-151

Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job whose detailed information you want to check, then press the left Any key to select

. 5 Check the details of the selected job, then press the right Any key to select . 6 If you want to print a list of transaction results, press the right Any key to select . If you do not want to print the list, go to step 8. 7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK]. 8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Fax

5-152

Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory

E-m ail

This chapter describes how to use e-mail functions.

E-mail Chapter 6

Overview of E-Mail Functions .....................................6-2 Introduction to Using E-Mail Functions .....................6-4 Basic E-Mail Operations ..............................................6-5

Sending E-Mail Documents .............................................6-5 Canceling Sending E-Mail Documents ........................6-7

E-m ail

6-2

Overview of E-Mail Functions

Overview of E-Mail Functions

You can send scanned documents as e-mail attachments. You can also print out received e-mail messages.

E-m ail

6-3

Overview of E-Mail Functions

E-m ail

6-4

Intrduction to Using E-Mail Functions

Introduction to Using E-Mail Functions

This machine enables you to send scanned documents to an e-mail application. Scanned documents are converted to file formats such as TIFF and are transmitted as an e-mail attachment to the recipients e-mail application. The necessary settings before using the scan to E-mail and I-fax function is as follows.

Network settings Connect the network cable and set the IP address to enable your machine to communicate over the network. For details, see Network Settings, in the e-Manual. E-mail settings Check the required information and set up the machine. For details, see Network Settings, in the e-Manual.

E-m ail

6-5

Basic E-Mail Operations

Basic E-Mail Operations

This section describes the basic procedures for sending e-mails and canceling a transmission in progress. If you select a file format for color from the , you will not be able to consecutively scan multiple-page originals from the platen glass. If you want to consecutively scan multiple-page originals using a file format for color, use the feeder instead.

Sending E-Mail Documents

This section describes the flow of sending e-mails.

1 Place your originals.

2 Press (Main Menu).

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use the software keyboard to enter the e-mail address, then press the right Any key to select .

You can enter up to 120 characters for the e- mail address. For information on using the software keyboard, see Entering Characters, on p. 1-19.

E-m ail

6-6

Basic E-Mail Operations

6 Make the scan settings you require.

You can specify the following settings: : Specifies the color type of originals and the file format for sending. (See E-mail, in the e-Manual.) : Adjusts the resolution of originals. (See E-mail, in the e-Manual.) : Adjusts the density and the background color of originals. (See E-mail, in the e-Manual.) : Adjusts the image quality of originals. (See E-mail, in the e-Manual.) <2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans two-sided originals for sending. (See E-mail, in the e-Manual.) : Specifies the transmission time. (See E-mail, in the e-Manual.) : Sets the name of the document for sending. (See E-mail, in the e-Manual.) : Sets your e-mail subject and message. (See E-mail, in the e-Manual.) : Sets the reply address to your e-mail. (See E-mail, in the e-Manual.) : Sets your e-mail priority. (See E-mail, in the e-Manual.) : Stores frequently used send settings for future use. (See E-mail, in the e-Manual.)

7 Press (Start).

Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK].

9 Press (Start).

Scanning starts. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop).

Canceling Sending E-Mail Documents

Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.

E-m ail

6-7

Basic E-Mail Operations

10 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original.

11 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select .

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination.

1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel) during transmission.

2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

E-m ail

6-8

Basic E-Mail Operations

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the job you want to cancel, then press the right Any key to select .

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK].

6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.

Printing

7-1

This chapter describes the basic print features.

Overview of Print Functions .......................................7-2 Introduction to Using Print Functions .......................7-4 Printing Documents from Computer .........................7-6 Scaling Documents ......................................................7-8 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet .....................7-10 2-Sided Printing .........................................................7-11 Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print) ............7-12

Memory Media Supported by This Machine .......... 7-12 Data Supported by This Machine................................ 7-13 Inserting Memory Media ............................................... 7-14 Removing Memory Media ............................................. 7-15 Printing from Memory Media ....................................... 7-15

Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs ............................................................................7-27

Checking Print Jobs ......................................................... 7-27 Canceling Print Jobs ........................................................ 7-28 Checking Print Logs ......................................................... 7-29

Printing Chapter 7

Printing

7-2

Overview of Print Functions

Overview of Print Functions

You can print on both sides of paper or use the mode that reduces multiple pages to fit onto one sheet of paper. You can also print out data from a memory medium inserted into the slot of the machine.

(p. 7-12)

20XX.12.01 20XX.12.02 20XX.12.03

(p. 7-20) (p. 7-22 and 7-24)

Printing

7-3

Overview of Print Functions

(p. 7-10)

(p. 7-11)

(p. 7-8)

Printing

7-4

Introduction to Using Print Functions

Introduction to Using Print Functions

Normally, the series of operations involved in printing data from a computer is specified by control commands generated using a printer driver. Control commands are a command system for controlling a printer. For example, when printing using a printer driver, control commands print data according to the following flow.

Using a printer driver, data to be printed is converted to control commands. Control command data is sent to the machine. Following the received control commands, the machine processes and prints the data.

To print in the following printer modes, a Printer Driver supported by this machine must be installed. For installing the driver to send a print job to the machine over a network, see Network Connection in the Starter Guide. For installing the driver to send a print job directly from your Computer to the machine, see USB Connection in the Starter Guide.

UFRII LT Mode

UFR (Ultra Fast Rendering) is printing technology developed by Canon. High-speed printing is made possible by sharing the processing of print data normally done by the machine with the computer.

PCL Mode

PCL (Print Control Language), developed by Hewlett-Packard, is a command system for controlling page printers. Command versions supported by this machine are PCL5c and PCL6.

PS Mode

PS (PostScript), developed by Adobe Systems, is a page description language renowned for its use in desktop publishing and publishing on demand. The version supported by this machine is PS3.

Printing

7-5

Introduction to Using Print Functions

The PCL and PS printing functions are available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn. The available printer drivers may vary, depending on the machine and the version of Windows that you are using. If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server computer in order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use Department ID Management. For instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, see Set Up Computers and Software in the Starter Guide. Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.

Printing

7-6

Printing Documents from Computer

Printing Documents from Computer

This section is the explanation of the basic procedure for printing from the computer (printer driver). Make sure that the printer driver is installed on your computer. To check if the driver is installed, see Set Up Computers and Software, in the Starter Guide. For details on the printer driver settings, see Online Help.

Printing methods may differ depending on the applications you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application software. The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service in the server computer in order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use Department ID Management. For instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, see Set Up Computers and Software in the Starter Guide. The machine may not be able to print data such as color photos if the data size of a single page is too large. If such is the case, reduce the data size by lowering the resolution or by changing the file format.

1 Open the document you want to print from the application.

2 Select [Print] from the [File] menu.

The printer driver screen is displayed.

The procedure to display the printer driver screen may differ depending on the applications you are using.

3 Select your printer, then click [Preferences].

Printing

7-7

Printing Documents from Computer

4 Configure the required settings in the printer driver screen, then click [OK].

5 Click [Print].

The name of the button to start printing may vary depending on the application you are using.

Printing begins.

Printing

7-8

Scaling Documents

Scaling Documents

You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output paper size, such as reducing a document created in LTR size to print on STMT, or enlarging a document created in STMT size to print on LTR. There are two methods for scaling a document: select the output size of the document to scale it automatically, or specify the scaling value manually.

Depending on the selected page size and printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document. Depending on the printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio for the selected page size. If you are using an application that enables you to enlarge or reduce the document, configure the settings in the application. The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.

1 Display the [Page Setup] sheet. 2 Select page size of the document you created in the application from [Page Size].

Printing

7-9

Scaling Documents

3 Select output size of the document from [Output Size].

The document is scaled automatically according to the settings made in [Page Size] and [Output Size].

4 If you want to increase or decrease the magnification manually, select [Manual Scaling] specify the scaling ratio for [Scaling].

If the ratio is less than 25% or more than 200%, the document is printed without scaling on the paper specified in [Output Size].

5 Click [OK].

Printing

7-10

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet

This mode enables you to reduce multiple pages to fit onto one sheet of paper. You can make well-organized documents by editing multiple materials onto one sheet. And you can cut down print costs by saving papers, and it is also useful for saving space.

Although there may be a function for printing multiple copies depending on the application you are using, do not used it together with this function. If you do, printing may not be executed correctly. You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this function. The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.

1 Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

2 Select the page layout from [Page Layout].

3 Select the page order from [Page Order].

4 Click [OK].

Printing

7-11

2-Sided Printing

2-Sided Printing

This mode enables you to make two-sided printing. You can cut down print costs by half when copying in large quantities.

The page sizes for which two-sided printing is available differ according to printer model. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the printer driver window to view the Online Help. The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver. Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine, the settings from the printer driver has priority.

1 Display the [Finishing] sheet.

2 Select [2-sided Printing] from [Print Style].

3 Select binding edge for the paper printout from [Binding Location].

4 Click [OK].

Printing

7-12

Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)

Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)

You can print data from a memory medium, such as an SD card by directly inserting it into the machine and selecting the desired image on the display. You do not need to connect the machine to your computer. The Direct Print function is available only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.

Memory Media Supported by This Machine

The memory media listed below are compatible with this machine.

USB Memory/Memory cards that can be directly inserted into the slot:

USB Memory

SD Secure Digital memory card SDHC memory card

Compact Flash (CF) Card : supports Type I/II (3.3 V) Microdrive

Printing

7-13

Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)

USB Memory/Memory cards that can be directly inserted into the slot:

Memory Stick Memory Stick PRO

Memory cards that can be inserted in the slot using an adapter:

If one of the following memory cards is inserted without an adapter, the card may get stuck in the slot. Be sure to attach an adapter to the memory card before inserting it into the slot.

miniSD Card*1

microSD Card*2

Memory Stick Duo*1

Memory Stick PRO Duo*1

*1 Use the special adapter provided with the card.

*2 Use the SD Card Adapter provided with the card.

Data Supported by This Machine

Note the followings so you can use an appropriate memory medium. Supported file systems of a memory are FAT16 and FAT32. You can not select the data contained in other folder at once. You can not select a data in a lower level folder. The following file formats are supported:

JPEG TIFF

JPEG files that conform to the following are supported: DCF/Exif2.21 or earlier/JFIF Number of pixels: 160 120 to 7,040 10,200 pixels (approximately equivalent to 11" 17" or A3 size in 600dpi) Number of pixels: 160 120 to 7,040 10,200 pixels Number of components: 3 Sampling ratios: 4:1:1 (16 16), 4:1:1 (32 8), 4:2:2 (16 8), or 4:4:4 (8 8)

Progressive JPEG files are not supported. Supported TIFF file format is TIFF Profile F, which is a black and white TIFF file format used for I-faxes.

Printing

7-14

Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)

The size of the TIFF image cannot be scaled for printing. If the size of the TIFF image exceeds the size of the selected paper, only the part that fits on the paper is printed. Depending on the files, some images cannot be displayed in the mode.

Inserting Memory Media

When a memory medium is inserted into the slot, the access lamp lights up. Do not touch the memory medium or the area around the memory medium slot/USB port at this point because the machine is accessing to the data in the memory medium. Doing so may damage the machine and the memory medium. When inserted, some memory media protrude from the slot. Do not force them into the slot any further. Doing so may damage the machine and the memory media. Make sure that the memory medium is correctly oriented before inserting it into the slot. Forcing an improperly positioned memory medium into the slot may damage the memory medium and/or the machine. Depending on the SD card, it may take a few seconds to recognize it.

How to nsert a memory medum

Insert only one memory medium into the slot. Confirm that the Access lamp has lit up.

Media Type Inserting Media

USB Memory

SD Secure Digital memory card SDHC memory card Memory Stick Memory Stick PRO Memory Stick Duo*1

Memory Stick PRO Duo*1

miniSD Card*1

microSD Card*2

Printing

7-15

Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)

Media Type Inserting Media

Compact Flash (CF) Card Microdrive

*1 Be sure to attach the memory medium to the special adapter before inserting it into the slot.

*2 Use SD Card Adapter Provided with the card.

Removing Memory Media

Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.

1 Insert a memory medium into the slot.

2 Confirm that the access lamp has lit up.

3 Press (Main Menu).

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

Printing from Memory Media

1 Make sure that the access lamp is not blinking, then remove the memory medium from the slot.

Printing

7-16

Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the memory medium that stores the data that you want to print, then press [OK].

If you want to print an index of all the files in the selected memory medium, see Index Printing, on p. 7-19.

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the folder that contains the data that you want to print, then press [OK].

If you select data which is saved outside the folder, skip to step 8.

If you want to select the data from the displayed images, press the left Any key to change the display method from to , then press [OK].

You can select the desired data by sorting all data according to date or extension. If you want to sort data by date, see Selecting Files by Date, on p. 7-22. If you want to sort data by extension, see Selecting Files by Extension, on p. 7-24.

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the data that you want to print, then press [OK].

In the mode, the screen below appears. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the data that you want to print, then press [OK].

You can select data by entering the desired copy quantity with (numeric keys) instead of pressing [OK]. You can select multiple data at once from one folder.

You can not select the data contained in other folders at once.

Printing

7-17

Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)

8 Press the right Any key to select .

In the mode, the screen below appears.

9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK].

The followings are the settings that can be made:

: Selects full color or B&W. : Selects paper for printing.

You cannot set when the custom size is specified for the stack bypass tray.

: Specifies the layout.

To make this setting, see the detailed procedures in the next page.

: Selects print quantity. : Prints the shooting date on data.

To make this setting, see the detailed procedures in the next page.

: Prints the file name on data.

To make this setting, see the detailed procedures in the next page.

: Makes green and blue more lively. : Adjusts brightness. : Optimizes data for printing.

The default setting is . is suitable for photos taken with a digital camera and is suitable for scanned images. In mode, printing from a memory card is automatically processed with and printing from USB memory is automatically processed with . For optimal images, select when printing scanned images stored in memory cards. When printing photos stored in a USB memory, select . can be set up for each file, but the other print settings cannot be specified for each file.

Printing

7-18

Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)

If you select :

The print quantity is limited to one. Only JPEG data can be printed. Even if the selected files contain TIFF data, only JPEG data is printed. The print size is adjusted automatically to fit on one sheet of paper. The order of the images in the layout cannot be specified. This setting cannot be used with two-sided printing. A blank space for printing the date and file name is left below the printed image even if or is set to .

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the layout type, then press [OK].

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

If you select or :

Only JPEG data can be printed. Even if the selected files contain TIFF data, only JPEG data is printed. The file name can consist of up to 20 characters.

Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

10 Press to start printing. When printing is complete, remove the memory medium.

Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.

Printing

7-19

Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)

Index Prntng

You can print an index of the data saved on a memory medium.

This functions is only available for JPEG. If the selected medium contains TIFF files, they are not printed.

1 Insert a memory medium into the slot.

2 Confirm that the access lamp has lit up.

3 Press (Main Menu).

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Press the right Any key to select .

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory medium, then press [OK].

You can not select multiple memory media or folders at once. If you press the right Any key to select , only the data saved outside folders will be printed.

7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired folder, then press the right Any key to select .

If the selected folder contains a subfolder, the files in that folder will not be printed.

The maximum depth of a sub-folder you can select is 20.

Printing

7-20

Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK].

Press [OK] after making each setting. : Selects full color or B&W. : Selects paper source for printing.

9 Press (Start). When printing is complete, remove the memory medium.

Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.

Selectng All Fles n Folder

You can print all files in the selected folder.

1 Insert a memory medium into the slot.

2 Confirm that the access lamp has lit up.

3 Press (Main Menu).

4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory medium, then press [OK].

6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the folder that contains the files that you want to print, then press [OK].

Printing

7-21

Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print)

7 Press the left Any key to select .

8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].

10 Press [OK] to select . 11 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK]. For details about , see step 9 in Printing from Memory Media, on p. 7-15. 12 Press (Start) to start printing. When printing is complete, remove the memory medium. Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.Printing 7-22 Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print) Selectng Fles by Date You can print only the selected files saved within the specified range of dates or all files on the specified dates. 1 Insert a memory medium into the slot. 2 Confirm that the access lamp has lit up. 3 Press (Main Menu). 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory medium, then press [OK]. 6 Press the left Any key to select . 7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].Printing 7-23 Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print) 9 Select the files by specifying dates. If you want to print only the selected files saved within the specified range of dates: Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the start date, then press [OK]. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the end date, then press [OK]. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file that you want to print, then press [OK]. Press the right Any key to select . If you want to print all files on the specified dates: Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the start date, then press [OK]. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the end date, then press [OK].Printing 7-24 Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print) 10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK]. For details about , see step 9 in Printing from Memory Media, on p. 7-15. 11 Press (Start) to start printing. When printing is complete, remove the memory medium. Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point. 1 Insert a memory medium into the slot. 2 Confirm that the access lamp has lit up. 3 Press (Main Menu). 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired memory medium, then press [OK]. 6 Press the left Any key to select . Selectng Fles by Extenson You can print only the selected files or all files of the specified extension. Printing 7-25 Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print) 7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 9 Select the files by specifying extensions. If you want to print only the selected files of the specified extension: Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired extension, then press [OK]. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the file that you want to print, then press [OK]. Press the right Any key to select . If you want to print all files of the specified extension: Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired extension, then press [OK].Printing 7-26 Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print) 10 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired setting, then press [OK]. For details about , see step 9 in Printing from Memory Media, on p. 7-15. 11 Press (Start) to start printing. When printing is complete, remove the memory medium. Do not remove the memory medium when the access lamp is blinking. The blinking lamp indicates that the machine is accessing the data in the memory medium. The data may be damaged if you remove the memory medium at this point.Printing 7-27 Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs 1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel). 2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the left Any key to select . 5 Check the print job status, then press the right Any key to select . 6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs You can check the numbers of prints and the print results, or you can cancel a print job before the printing starts. Checking Print Jobs Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is on or blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is off, there are no jobs in the memory of the print job status.Printing 7-28 Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs Canceling Print Jobs Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is on or blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is off, there are no print jobs in the memory. 1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel). 2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired job, then press the right Any key to select . 5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select . 6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.Printing 7-29 Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs 1 Press (Status Monitor/Cancel). 2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the desired log, then press the left Any key to select . 5 Check the print log, then press the right Any key to select . 6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. Checking Print LogsPrinting 7-30 Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print LogsScanning This chapter describes how to use scanner functions. Overview of Scanner Functions ..................................8-2 Introduction to Using Scanner Functions ..................8-4 For Scanning Documents to a Shared Folder (File Server) ............................................................................8-4 For Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer ...............................................................................8-4 Basic Scanning Operations .........................................8-6 Scanning Documents to a File Server ..........................8-6 Scanning Documents to a USB Memory .....................8-8 Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer ............................................................................ 8-10 Scanning Chapter 8Scanning 8-2 Overview of Scanner Functions Overview of Scanner Functions You can transmit scanned documents over the network to your computer. You also can store scanned documents in a file server or USB memory.Scanning 8-3 Overview of Scanner FunctionsScanning 8-4 Introduction to Using Scanner Functions Introduction to Using Scanner Functions The necessary settings before sending scanned documents to a shared folder (file server), or scanning documents from a computer are as follows. For Scanning Documents to a Shared Folder (File Server) Network Settngs Connect the network cable and set the IP address to enable your machine to communicate over the network. For details, see Network Settings, in the e-Manual. Shared Folder (Fle Server) Settngs Check the required information and set up the machine and computer to enable you to send scanned documents to a shared folder. For details, see Network Settings, in the e-Manual. For Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer TWAIN-complant Applcatons Color Network ScanGear is launched from the menu of a TWAIN-compliant application (applications capable of modifying images or inserting them into a document, such as Adobe Photoshop, Microsoft Office, etc.). A TWAIN-compliant application must be installed in your computer, since Color Network ScanGear cannot be used as an independent application software. Network Settngs Connect the network cable and set the IP address to enable your machine to communicate over the network. For details, see Network Settings, in the e-Manual. If you want to use the machine as a network scanner, it must be connected to a computer over an IPv4 network. Color Network ScanGear Color Network ScanGear is an application software required in order to scan documents from a computer. For information on how to install the software, see Set Up Computers and Software, in the Starter Guide. If Color Network ScanGear is already installed, select the [start] (or [Start]) menu on the computer, then [Program](or [All Programs]). The [Color Network ScanGear] folder is displayed. Scanning 8-5 Introduction to Using Scanner Functions ScanGear Tool Before scanning documents from a computer, you need to select the machine for scanning using the ScanGear Tool. For details, see Set Up Computers and Software, in the Starter Guide. ScanGear Tool is an application software included with the Color Network ScanGear. ScanGear Tool is installed together with the Color Network ScanGear driver. Scanning 8-6 Basic Scanning Operations Basic Scanning Operations Scanning Documents to a File Server This section describes the basic procedure for scanning documents to a shared folder in a computer. If you select a file format for color from the , you will not be able to consecutively scan multiple-page originals from the platen glass. If you want to consecutively scan multiple-page originals using a file format for color, use the feeder instead. 1 Place your originals. 2 Press (Main Menu). 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or , then press [OK]. If you select , use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Specify the file servers address. For information on how to specify the file servers address, see Scan, in the e-Manual. 6 Make the scan settings you require.Scanning 8-7 Basic Scanning Operations You can specify the following settings: : Specifies the color type of originals and the file format for sending. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) : Adjusts the resolution of originals. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) : Adjusts the density and the background color of originals. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) : Adjusts the image quality of originals. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) <2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans two-sided originals for sending. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) : Specifies the transmission time. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) : Sets the name of the document for sending. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) : Sets the message body text. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) : Stores frequently used send settings for future use. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) 7 Press (Start). Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop). 8 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK]. 9 Press (Start). Scanning starts. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop). 10 Follow the instructions on the display, then press (Start) once for each original. Scanning 8-8 Basic Scanning Operations 11 When scanning is complete, press the right Any key to select . The scanned data is sent to the specified destination. Scanning Documents to a USB Memory This section describes the basic procedure for storing scanned documents to a USB memory. If you use the platen glass to scan your originals, you will not be able to scan multiple-page originals consecutively. Also in the screen, you will be able to select or in the menu but the function will be ineffective. To scan multiple-page originals consecutively, use the feeder. 1 Insert your USB memory to an appropriate slot on the right side of the control panel. 2 Place your originals. 3 Press (Main Menu). Scanning 8-9 Basic Scanning Operations 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If in is set to , is not displayed. (See Security, in the e-Manual.) 6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the media you want to store in, then press the right Any key to select . 7 Make the scan settings you require. You can specify the following settings: : Specifies the color type of originals and the file format for sending. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) : Adjusts the resolution of originals. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) : Adjusts the density and the background color of originals. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) : Adjusts the image quality of originals. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) <2-Sided Orig. Orientation Set.>: Scans two- sided originals for sending. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) : Sets the name of the document for sending. (See Scan, in the e-Manual.) 8 Press (Start). Scanning starts if the original is placed in the feeder, and the scanned data is sent to the specified medium. To cancel scanning, press the left Any key to select or press (Stop). Scanning 8-10 Basic Scanning Operations 9 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select the original size, then press [OK]. 10 Press (Start). The scanned data is sent to the specified medium. Scanning Documents from a Networked Computer With the Color Network ScanGear driver installed in your computer, you can remotely scan an original set on the machine and import the scanned image over the network to a TWAIN-compliant application*. (* See NOTE below for more information on TWAIN-compliant applications.) Before proceeding to the procedure below, see Introduction to Using Scanner Functions, on p. 8-4 and make sure that all the setups are complete for scanning originals from a computer. Color Network ScanGear cannot be used as an independent application software. To use the Color Network ScanGear driver, a TWAIN- compliant application (such as Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Acrobat, Microsoft Word/Excel/PowerPoint of Microsoft Office 2000 or later, etc.) is required. TWAIN is a technical standard for connecting a computer to an image capturing device, such as a scanner, digital camera, etc. Scanning 8-11 Basic Scanning Operations 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. When scanning originals remotely from a computer, you must switch the machine online. For details, see Scan, in the e-Manual. If you want to continue scanning another original, keep the Use Remote Scan screen in step 4 displayed. If you change the screen, the machine will automatically go offline when scanning is complete or as soon as the preview image is displayed. If you press (Main Menu) while the machine is online, the machine will automatically go offline. 5 Place your original on the platen glass or in the feeder. The Color Network ScanGear driver cannot store scanned images or convert them to PDF or other file formats. Store the imported images with the TWAIN-compliant application. The Color Network ScanGear driver is a software used with the machine connected to a computer over the network. The software does not support USB connection. Scanning 8-12 Basic Scanning Operations 6 Start the TWAIN-compliant application to select Color Network ScanGear as the scanner to be used. The command names for this operation includes [Select a scanner], [Select a device], etc. depending on the application you are using. For details, see the documentation that comes with the application software used. For the operation procedures for starting the Color Network ScanGear driver to scan images from an application software, see Scan, in the e-Manual. You will find the operation procedures using Microsoft Word 2007 and 2003. 7 From the menu of the application software, select the command to start the Color Network ScanGear driver. The command names for this operation includes [New scan], [Import from TWAIN source], etc. depending on the application you are using. For details, see the documentation that comes with the application software used. When you select the command to start the Color Network ScanGear driver, and if it does not start and an error message such as Scanner is not connected. appears, check if all the setups are complete for scanning originals from a computer. (See Introduction to Using Scanner Functions, on p. 8-4.) 8 On the Color Network ScanGear [Main] sheet, select [Platen], [Feeder (1-sided)], or [Feeder (2-sided)] from [Original Placement] according to the location of the original placed in step 5. If [Platen] is selected, clicking on [Preview] allows you to see the preview image of your scan. 9 On the [Main] and [Options] sheets, select the desired settings for Color Mode, Resolution, etc. For more information on the settings on each sheet, see the Online Help (displayed when the Help icon on the toolbar is clicked).10 Click [Scan]. To cancel scanning, click [Cancel] in the [Transfer Pages] dialog box. The scanned images are inserted in the document when the scanning is complete. 11 After scanning is complete, switch the scanner offline. (Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].) To use other functions of the machine, such as copying, you must switch the machine offline. For details, see Scan, in the e-Manual. 12 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. Scanning 8-13 Basic Scanning OperationsScanning 8-14 Basic Scanning OperationsN etw ork 9-1 Flowchart for Setting Up Network .............................9-2 What is the Network? ..................................................9-3 Overview of Network Functions .................................9-4 This chapter describes what the network is, what you can do with the network, and what you have to do to use the machine with the network. Network Chapter 9N etw ork 9-2 Flowchart for Setting Up Network Flowchart for Setting Up Network Follow the procedures in the flowchart below to set up each network function. N etw ork 9-3 What is the Network? What is the Network? In the computer field, a network is a system of interconnected computers that communicate with each other. Internet and LAN are the two most common words used to refer to networks. The Internet is the vast network to which computers all over the world are connected. Computers connected to the Internet anywhere in the world can exchange information with one another. On the other hand, LAN is the abbreviation for Local Area Network and means a network within a limited area (in an office, for example).N etw ork 9-4 Overview of Network Functions Overview of Network Functions This section describes actions you can perform using the network function.Settings from a PC 10-1 Settings from a PC This chapter describes how to use the Remote UI functions. Overview of Remote UI .............................................10-2 Starting the Remote UI..............................................10-4 Settings from a PC Chapter10Settings from a PC 10-2 Overview of Remote UI Overview of Remote UI Remote UI enables you to check the machines status and manage the machines functions from a computer on the network using a web browser. Using the computer keyboard, the management process, such as entering addresses to the address book will be easier.Settings from a PC 10-3 Overview of Remote UI Checking the Device Information from a computer The Remote UI enables you to check the device information. Accessing to the device information from the distant place provides you with easy device management. For details, see Checking Device Status and Information in the e-Manual. Managing jobs from a computer The Remote UI enables you to manage print jobs and view job logs. Accessing to the print job information from the distant place provides you with easy job management. For details, see Job Management in the e-Manual. Editing the Address Book from a computer The Remote UI enables you to make additions and changes to each item of the address book. You can use the PC keyboard, so entering a lot of addresses to the address book will be easier. For details, see Managing the Address Book in the e-Manual. Setting/registering from a computer The Remote UI enables you to specify the machines system settings. You can specify the various custom system settings more easily and speedy. For details, see Customizing System Settings in the e-Manual. By using remote UI you can set and confirm following functions. Settings from a PC 10-4 Starting the Remote UI Starting the Remote UI To start the Remote UI, follow the procedure described below. 1 Prepare the Network. Set up the machine for use in a network, then connect the machine and the computer to your network router or a hub. For details, see Setup Computers and Software, in the Starter Guide. 2 Start the web browser. 3 Enter the IP address of the machine in [Address] or [Location], then press [Enter] on the keyboard. For details on how to check the IP address, see Setting and Checking the IP Address, in the e-Manual. The Remote UI screen appears. 4 Enter the required data. The required data differ depending on the authentication mode you are using. If both Department ID and User Management are disabled: Select [System Manager Mode] or [End-User Mode].Settings from a PC 10-5 Starting the Remote UI For System Manager Mode enter the System Manager ID and the Password, and click OK. For End-User Mode, enter the User Name and click OK. For Department ID Management mode: Enter the Department ID and Password, and click OK. For User Management mode: Enter the User ID and Password, and click OK. If no password is set, you can log on without entering a password.Settings from a PC 10-6 Starting the Remote UI 5 Operate the Machine. Now you can manage the machine on the web browser. For details, see Settings from a PC, in the e-Manual. For details on the Remote UI settings, see Online Help.M aintenance This chapter describes how to perform routine cleaning operations, and replace toner cartridges. Maintenance Chapter11 Cleaning the Machine ...............................................11-2 Exterior ................................................................................. 11-2 Interior .................................................................................. 11-3 Scanning Area .................................................................... 11-4 Replacing the Toner Cartridges ................................11-7 When a Message Appears ............................................. 11-7 Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One .... 11-8 Recycling Used Cartridges ......................................11-13 The Clean Earth Campaign - The Canon Cartridge Return Program ...........................................11-13 U.S.A. PROGRAM .............................................................11-14 Canadian Program Programme au Canada .......11-17 Transporting the Machine ......................................11-1911-2 Cleaning the Machine M aintenance Cleaning the Machine Note the following before cleaning your machine: Make sure no documents are stored in memory when you turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord. Use a soft cloth to avoid scratching the components. Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, or similar materials for cleaning; they can stick to the components or generate static charges. Never use volatile liquids such as thinner, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to clean the machine. These can damage the machine components. You cannot send or receive documents when the main power switch is turned off or the power cord is disconnected. If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased. Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected. When you turn OFF the main power switch, the documents stored in memory will be erased. To check the jobs stored in memory, see the following: Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs/Checking Copy Logs on p. 4-72. Checking and Canceling Print Jobs/Checking Print Logs on p. 7-27. Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory on p. 5-147. Canceling Sending E-Mail Documents on p. 6-7. Checking/Changing the Status of Scanning Data in Memory (Scan to File Server), in the e-Manual. Exterior Clean the exterior of the machine. 1 Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord. 2 Wipe the machines exterior with a clean, soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water or diluted dishwashing detergent solution. 3 Wait for the machine to dry, then reconnect the power cord and turn ON the main power switch.11-3 Cleaning the Machine M aintenance Interior Clean the machines print area periodically to prevent toner powder and paper dust from accumulating inside. Cleanng the Fxng Unt If black streaks appear on printed output, the fixing unit may be dirty. Also, you should use the Fixing Unit Cleaning procedure every time the toner cartridge is replaced. Print the cleaning pattern on LTR paper for cleaning the fixing unit. As cleaning paper, LTR or A4 paper must be loaded in the paper drawer or the stack bypass tray. Cleaning the fixing unit takes approximately 60 seconds. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 4 Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].11-4 Cleaning the Machine M aintenance 5 Confirm that is displayed, then press [OK]. Printing starts. Discard the cleaning paper after use. The cleaning process cannot be canceled. Please wait until it is completed. 6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. Scanning Area Keep the scanning area clean to avoid dirty copies or faxes to be sent. Cleanng the Platen Glass Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder by following the procedure below. 1 Open the feeder. 2 Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth. Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may tear the document or damage the machine.11-5 Cleaning the Machine M aintenance 3 Close the feeder. Cleanng the Feeder Automatcally If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder, clean the rollers of the feeder. Use LTR or A4 paper as cleaning paper. It takes approximately 30 seconds to clean the feeder. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 4 Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].11-6 Cleaning the Machine M aintenance 5 Place 10 sheets of blank paper into the feeder. 6 Confirm that is displayed, then press [OK]. The display returns to the Adjustment/Cleaning screen. Discard the cleaning paper after use. The cleaning process cannot be canceled. Please wait until it is completed. 7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.11-7 Replacing the Toner Cartridges M aintenance Replacing the Toner Cartridges This section describes how to replace or handle the toner cartridges and precautions on storing them. When a Message Appears Toner cartridges are consumable products. If the toner is running out during printing, a message appears in the display. Message When it is Displayed Contents and Remedies Prepare a new toner cartridge. (XXX*) When a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Prepare a new toner cartridge. Replacing the toner cartridge is recommended before performing a bulk printing. Check the XXX* toner. A toner cartridge that cannot guarantee print quality because it has reached the end of its life etc., or a toner cartridge that has already been spent may be set. Continued use of this toner cartridge may cause the machine to malfunction. Replacing of the toner cartridge is recommended. Replace the toner cartridge. (XXX*) When the toner runs out. Replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color. Incidentally, even if any of Yellow, Cyan or Magenta toner runs out, black and white printing can still be performed if Black toner remains. * XXX indicates Black, Yellow, Cyan, or Magenta.11-8 Replacing the Toner Cartridges M aintenance Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One If any of the following messages appears, replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color with a new one. : Replace the black toner cartridge. : Replace the yellow toner cartridge. : Replace the cyan toner cartridge. : Replace the magenta toner cartridge. Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames. This may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or fire. Do not pull out the sealing tape forcefully or stop at midpoint, as this may cause toner to spill out. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and consult a physician. When closing the front cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught. 1 Open the front cover by using the handle (A). The toner cartridges are installed in order of black, yellow, cyan, and magenta from the top as shown in the figure. 2 To prevent damage to the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit (A), cover the thin plastic belt with paper (A4 size paper is recommended) as shown in the figure and be sure that they do not move out of place.11-9 Replacing the Toner Cartridges M aintenance When installing or removing the toner cartridges, be sure to place paper on the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit to protect the belt. Do not place any object on or touch the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit. The transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit has a self cleaning function, therefore, do not clean the belt even when the toner is on it. If the delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt (A) is damaged, this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality. 3 Hold the blue tabs on the both sides of toner cartridge, and pull it horizontally. Do not touch the high-voltage contact (A) or the electrical contacts (B), as this may result in damage to the printer. 4 Take the new toner cartridge out of the protective bag after taking it out of the package. There is a cut near the arrow on the protective bag, so you can open it by hand. However, if you cannot open it by hand, use scissors to open the protective bag so as not to damage the toner cartridge.11-10 Replacing the Toner Cartridges M aintenance 5 Gently rock the toner cartridge several times to evenly distribute the toner inside. 6 Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface, fold back the tab of the sealing tape (A) located at left side of the toner cartridge. 7 Remove the sealing tape (approx. 18 7/8 inch long) gently by hooking your fingers into the tab and pulling it out straight in the direction of the arrow. Do not pull the seal out at an angle. Do not open the drum protective shutter (A). If toner is adhered on the removed seal, be careful that your hands or clothes do not get dirty from touching the toner. If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching the toner, wash them immediately in cold water. Do not use hot water. If you do, the toner may be set permanently. Do not pull the seal out at an angle. 11-11 Replacing the Toner Cartridges M aintenance 8 Hook your finger into the tab and remove the packing materials (A) located at right side of the toner cartridge. 9 Hold the toner cartridge properly by the blue tabs on the both sides with the arrowed side facing up. Do not hold the toner cartridge in a manner that is not directed in this procedure. 10 Align (A) of the toner cartridge that you want to replace with the slots (B) to which the label of the same color is attached, then insert the cartridge until it stops. 11 After removing all the packing materials on the each toner cartridges and installing the cartridges, remove the paper on the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit. When removing the paper, be careful not to touch or damage the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit.11-12 Replacing the Toner Cartridges M aintenance 12 Close the front cover. If you cannot close the front cover, do not force it to close. Open the cover and make sure the toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.11-13 Recycling Used Cartridges M aintenance Recycling Used Cartridges Canon has instituted a worldwide recycling program for cartridges called The Clean Earth Campaign. This program preserves precious natural resources by utilizing a variety of materials found in the used cartridges that are of no further use, to remanufacture new cartridges which, at the same time, keeps the environment cleaner by reducing landfill waste. Complete details concerning this program are enclosed in each Cartridge box. The Clean Earth Campaign - The Canon Cartridge Return Program The Canon Cartridge Return Program fulfills the first initiative of Canons Clean Earth Campaign, which supports four critical environmental areas: Recycling in the Workplace Conserving Environmental Resources Scientific Research and Education Encouraging Appreciation of the Outdoors Clean Earth initiatives supported by Canon in the U.S. include Eyes on Yellowstone, Canon Envirothon, NATURE Series on PBS and The Canon Clean Earth Crew. Initiatives supported in Canada include Canon Envirothon and World Wildlife Fund - Canada. Since its inception, The Canon Cartridge Return Program has collected millions of cartridges that otherwise would have been discarded into landfills or similar facilities. Instead, this rapidly growing program recovers used cartridges and separates them into components which are then put to various industrial uses. Becoming a part of this worthwhile program is easy. When your cartridge is of no further use, simply follow the instructions detailed for U.S. or Canadian residents. We appreciate your support of The Canon Cartridge Return Program. Working together we can make a significant contribution to a cleaner planet. Cartridges collected through this program are not refilled. This program may be modified or discontinued without notice. 11-14 Recycling Used Cartridges M aintenance U.S.A. PROGRAM Packagng One Box Return To receive your free eight cartridge collection box: Call 1-800-OK-CANON or Visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth/return OR Place as many cartridges as possible into one box. Carefully seal the box with tape; OR Place an empty toner cartridge in the box that contained your new toner cartridge. 11-15 Recycling Used Cartridges M aintenance Bundled Return Bundle multiple cartridge boxes together securely with tape. Please be sure that the shipment does not exceed UPS specifications (See Below). Maximum weight = 70 pounds Maximum length = 108 inches Maximum girth (length + 2 x width + 2 x height) = 130 inches Please Note: Do not send defective cartridges for replacement. Defective cartridges under warranty should be exchanged by an authorized dealer or service facility as provided in the warranty.11-16 Recycling Used Cartridges M aintenance Shppng Make sure the UPS A.R.S. label is applied. UPS Pick-up Give the shipment to your UPS driver when you receive your next regular delivery. Call 1-800-PICK-UPS for Drop-Off options in your area. By using either of the above methods of shipment, your used cartridge(s) will be forwarded to the Canon Cartridge Collection Center at no charge to you. Residents of Alaska and Hawaii: Do not use UPS authorized return label. Alternative return service with the U.S. Postal Service is available by calling 1-800-OK-CANON or visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth/return For further information about the Clean Earth Campaign in the United States, please call: 1-800-OK-CANON or visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth 11-17 Recycling Used Cartridges M aintenance Canadian Program Programme au Canada Single Box Return Repackage the empty toner cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new cartridges box. Place the empty toner cartridge in the box from your new toner cartridge. Seal the box. Apply the Canon Canada Inc./ Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canons labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage. Deposit your empty toner cartridge in any full size street mailbox or take it to your local Canada Post outlet or franchise. 11-18 Recycling Used Cartridges M aintenance Volume Box Return (Maximum 8 Cartridges) We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges. Please tape your eight cartridges together and place them in a box. Apply the Canon Canada Inc. / Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canons labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage. Deliver to any local Canada Post outlet or franchise. Customers who hold a Commercial pick-up agreement with Canada Post may have their collection box picked up. Working to protect the environment is a long-standing Canon interest. To this end, for every cartridge collected, Canon Canada donates funds to World Wildlife Fund - Canada and the Canon Envirothon. For further information about The Clean Earth Campaign in Canada, please write to Canon. Canon Canada Inc. Corporate Customer Relations 6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, ON L5T 1P7 11-19 Transporting the Machine M aintenance Transporting the Machine Follow this procedure to avoid vibration damage to the machine when transporting it over a long distance. 1 Turn OFF the main power switch. 2 Disconnect the power cord and all the cables from the machine. Disconnect the power cord from the machine. Disconnect the LAN and USB cables, if any are connected to the machine. Disconnect the telephone cable and other cables from the machine if you connect your own telephone to the machine. 3 If you are using the output tray extension, fold the paper stopper, and then push the output tray extension into the machine.11-20 Transporting the Machine M aintenance 4 If you are using the stack bypass tray, fold stack bypass tray extension, push back the auxiliary tray into place, and then close the stack bypass tray. 5 Pull out the paper drawer gently. 6 Hold the paper drawer with both hands and remove it from the machine. Remove the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 from the machine if it is installed. To remove the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1, perform the installation procedure in reverse. (See the sheet Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 Setup Instruction.) 7 Pick up the machine using the hand grips on the left, right and back of the machine. Check the weight of the machine to carry it safely. (See Specifications, on p. 14-2.) If you need to install the Cassette Feeding Unit- AC1 in the machine, place the feeder at the installation site first, and then transport the machine to the site. For directions on how to install the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1, see the sheet Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 Setup Instruction. Troubleshooting This chapter explains how to respond to paper and original jams, as well as to error messages. See Troubleshooting, in the e-Manual to troubleshoot problems on the machines functions such as Copy, Fax, or Print, and problems on the computer or network settings. Troubleshooting Chapter12 Clearing Jams .............................................................12-2 Original Jams ...................................................................... 12-3 Paper Delivery Tray ........................................................... 12-5 Duplex Unit ......................................................................... 12-6 Stack Bypass Tray .............................................................. 12-8 Paper Drawer 1 ................................................................12-10 Optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) ...............12-11 Inside of the Machine ....................................................12-13 Fixing Unit .........................................................................12-16 Back Cover .........................................................................12-18 When the Message Does Not Disappear ................12-19 If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly ...................................................................12-22 Error Messages.........................................................12-24 Error Codes ...............................................................12-34 If a Message Such as is displayed .......12-41 Reloading the Paper ......................................................12-42 Changing the Paper Size Setting ..............................12-42 If a Power Failure Occurs .........................................12-45 If You Cannot Solve a Problem ................................12-46 Customer Support (U.S.A.) ...........................................12-46 Customer Support (Canada) .......................................12-4612-2 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting Clearing Jams When , , or appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the machine. The screen indicating the location of the paper jam and the procedure for clearing the paper jam appears on the display, and it remains there until the paper jam is entirely cleared. Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams: Check that the paper you are using meets the requirements for use. (See Paper Requirements, on p. 2-7.) Make sure you have removed any scraps of paper from the inside of the machine. Fan and tap the paper stack on a flat surface before loading it in the machine. When removing the jammed document or paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the document or paper. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting inside of the machine, be careful not to allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this can result in burns or electrical shock. When removing jammed paper, be careful not to get any toner on your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water sets the toner, making it impossible to remove the toner stains. If paper is jammed, remove the jammed paper so that any pieces of paper do not remain inside the machine according to the displayed message. Also, do not put your hand in an area other than indicated areas, as this may result in personal injuries or burns. If you tear the paper, remove any torn pieces to avoid further jams. If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching the toner, wash them immediately in cold water. Do not use hot water. If you do, the toner may be set permanently. Do not force a jammed document or paper out of the machine. Contact Canon Customer Care Center if needed. 12-3 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 1 Open the feeder cover. 2 Hold both sides of any jammed original and gently pull it out. Do not force a jammed original out of the machine. If the jammed original cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step. 3 Open the inner cover, holding it by its front tab (A). 4 Lift the release lever (A) until it clicks into place. Original Jams If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed original from the feeder. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.12-4 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 5 Remove the jammed original. Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine as it may tear. 6 Return the release lever (A) to its original position. 7 Close the inner cover. 8 Close the feeder cover. 9 Load the original in the feeder again.12-5 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 1 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out. Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step. If unfixed toner is on the removed paper, it may adhere to the paper to be printed next. 2 Open and close the front cover to reset the machine. If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Use the handle (A) to gently close the front cover. Paper Delivery Tray If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the output tray. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.12-6 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 1 Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked. 2 Open the inner cover, holding it by its center tab (A). 3 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out. Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step. 4 Close the inner cover. Duplex Unit If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the duplex unit. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.12-7 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 5 Lower the scanning platform. 6 Open and close the front cover to reset the machine. If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Close the front cover gently holding the handle (A).12-8 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 1 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out. Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step. 2 Close the stack bypass tray. Stack Bypass Tray If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the stack bypass tray. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.12-9 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 3 Open and close the front cover to reset the machine. Close the front cover gently holding the handle (A).12-10 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting Paper Drawer 1 If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the paper drawer. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure. 1 Using the handle, pull the paper drawer half way out. 2 Push downward on the jammed paper as you remove it. Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. Doing so may result in the feed roller coming off. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step. 3 Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position. 4 Open and close the front cover to reset the machine. If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Close the front cover gently holding the handle (A).12-11 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 1 Using the handle, pull the paper drawer half way out. 2 Push downward on the jammed paper as you remove it. Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. Doing so may result in the feed roller coming off. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step. Optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the optional paper drawer. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.12-12 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 3 Gently push the optional paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position. 4 Open and close the front cover to reset the machine. If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Close the front cover gently holding the handle (A).12-13 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 1 Open the front cover If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Open the front cover gently holding the handle (A). When removing jammed paper, be sure to place paper on the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit to protect the belt. Do not place any object on or touch the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit. The transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit is supplied with a function that cleans itself, therefore, do not clean the belt even when the toner is on it. If the delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt (A) is damaged, this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality. If the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer differs from the paper size set in the or the paper size set on the printer driver, a paper jam may occur. If this is the case, load the correct size paper before removing the jammed paper. If you remove the jammed paper before re-loading the correct size paper, another paper jam may occur. Make sure to re-load the correct size paper before removing the jammed paper. Inside of the Machine If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the inside of the machine. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.12-14 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 2 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and pull it out in the direction of the arrow. Gently remove the jammed paper in the direction of the arrow to prevent unfixed toner from spilling. When removing the paper, be careful not to touch the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit or toner cartridge. Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step. 3 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow. Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step. 4 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out in the direction of the arrow. Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step. 5 Press the lock release buttons (A) on the duplex print transport guide and lift the duplex print transport guide (B). If you are not performing two-sided printing, proceed to the next step. Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.12-15 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 6 Remove the jammed paper while lifting the duplex print transport guide. Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step. 7 Lower the duplex print transport guide until it clicks into its original position. Make sure that the duplex print transport guide is closed completely. If the duplex print transport guide is not closed completely, this may result in misfeeds or paper jams. 8 Hold the tab (A) of the delivery feeder unit, and lift the delivery feeder unit until it clicks. If the delivery feeder unit comes off, see If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly, on p. 12-22. 9 Remove the jammed paper in the direction of the arrow. Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.12-16 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 1 Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked. 2 Open the fixing cover, holding it by its left tab (A). Fixing Unit If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the display, remove the jammed paper from the fixing unit. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure. 10 Close the front cover.12-17 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 3 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out. Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step. 4 Close the fixing cover. 5 Lower the scanning platform.12-18 Clearing Jams Troubleshooting 1 Open the back cover. 2 Hold both sides of any jammed paper and gently pull it out. 3 Close the back cover. 4 Open and close the front cover to reset the machine. If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Close the front cover gently holding the handle (A). Back Cover If a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the LCD display, remove the jammed paper from the back side of the machine. Then press the right Any key to display the next procedure.12-19 When the Message Does Not Disappear Troubleshooting When the Message Does Not Disappear When the message that indicates a paper jam occurring inside the top cover does not disappear even after the jammed paper is removed, this indicates that the jammed paper still remains in the fixing unit. Remove the fixing unit using the following procedure to remove the jammed paper. The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the printer are hot during use. Make sure the fixing unit is completely cool before removing the jammed paper. Touching the fixing unit when it is still hot may result in burns. When you remove the fixing unit, you have to turn the main power switch OFF. Sending or receiving documents cannot be done when the main power switch is OFF or the power cord is disconnected. If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased. Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected. 1 Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord. 2 Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is locked. 3 Grasp and pull the tab (A) on the left side of the top cover to open the fixing cover.12-20 When the Message Does Not Disappear Troubleshooting 4 Move the control panel into the upright position. 5 Press the blue tabs (A) and hold the fixing unit by the parts indicated with arrows. 6 Remove the fixing unit with both hands. 7 Place the fixing unit on a flat surface. 8 Open the fixing unit cover. 9 Remove the jammed paper. 10 Install the fixing unit. 11 Close the fixing cover.12-21 When the Message Does Not Disappear Troubleshooting 12 Lower the scanning platform. 13 Reconnect the power cord and turn on the main power switch.12-22 If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly Troubleshooting If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly If the delivery feeder unit is not installed correctly, an error code appears on the display. Follow the procedure below to install the delivery feeder unit correctly. If the error code does not disappear after the delivery feeder unit is installed correctly, contact Canon Customer Care Center. You have to remove the delivery feeder unit and re-install the delivery feeder unit correctly. When you remove the delivery feeder unit, you have to turn the main power switch OFF. Sending or receiving documents cannot be done when the main power switch is OFF or the power cord is disconnected. If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased. Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected. 1 Turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power cord. Make sure that the Processing/Data Indicator is turned off and check the display to confirm that a job is not being processed. 2 Open the front cover. If you are using the stack bypass tray, close it before opening the front cover. Open the front cover gently holding the handle (A). 3 Push the levers (A) on both sides of the delivery feeder unit and remove the delivery feeder unit gently, holding it by the tabs (B).12-23 If the Delivery Feeder Unit Is Not Installed Correctly Troubleshooting Do not place any object on or touch the transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit. The transfer belt (A) of the delivery feeder unit is supplied with a function that cleans itself, therefore, do not clean the belt even when the toner is on it. If the delivery feeder unit is broken or transfer belt (A) is damaged, this may result in misfeeds or deterioration in print quality. 4 Install the delivery feeder unit so that the protrusions (A) of the delivery feeder unit fit into the guides (B) and click into place. 5 Confirm that the triangle marks (A) on the delivery feeder unit are aligned with the triangle marks (B) on the machine. 6 Close the front cover Close the front cover gently holding the handle. 7 Reconnect the power cord and turn on the main power switch.12-24 Error Messages Troubleshooting Error Messages When a message appears on the display, please refer to the examples of error messages in the table below. Message Description Action A cover is open. The front cover or the fixing unit cover is open. Close the front cover or the fixing unit cover. Avail. Mem. This message shows the percentage of the memory currently available. This message is displayed when you set the originals in the feeder in Fax/Send mode. If you need more space, wait for the machine to send any documents in memory. Also print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory. Cannot complete searching due to timeout. Check the settings. The machine could not search for destinations within the specified time. Increase the time setting for in . (See Network Settings, in the e-Manual.) An error occurred on the LDAP server side. Check that the LDAP server is functioning normally. Cannot connect to the selected server. Check the settings. The machine cannot connect to the specified IP address/port. Check the gateway address setting. (See Network Settings, in the e-Manual.) Check the server address and port number for the LDAP server. (See Network Settings, in the e-Manual.) Check that the LDAP server is operating properly. If is set to for the LDAP server, check whether UDP (User Datagram Protocol) packages are blocked by the filter. Cannot connect to the server because timer settings for this device differ to those of the selected server. The time setting of the LDAP server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. The machine cannot connect to an LDAP server if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart with set to for the LDAP server. Check the time settings on the server and the machine. Cannot find server. The IP address that the machine should connect to cannot be determined. Check the DNS (Domain Name System) Server Settings in TCP/IPv4 or v6 in in (from the Additional Functions screen).12-25 Error Messages Troubleshooting Message Description Action Cannot find the selected server. Check the settings. The IP address that the machine should connect to cannot be determined. Check the DNS (Domain Name System) server settings. (See Network Settings, in the e-Manual.) Check whether the DNS servers DNS settings are correct. If is set to for the LDAP server, the machine cannot determine the host name. Check the DNS (Domain Name System) server settings. (See Network Settings, in the e-Manual.) Check the XXX toner. (XXX indicates Black, Yellow, Cyan, or Magenta.) A toner cartridge that cannot guarentee print quality because it has reached the end of its life etc., or a toner cartridge that has already been spent may be set. Continued use of this toner cartridge may cause the machine to malfunction. Replacing of the toner cartridge is recommended. (See Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One, on p. 11-8.) Check the XXX toner connection. (XXX indicates Black, Yellow, Cyan, or Magenta.) There may be a problem with the toner cartridge connection of the indicated color. Take out the toner cartridge of the indicated color, then properly set it again. For detailed instructions, (see Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One, on p. 11-8.) Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it ON again. When this message does not disappear even if you take the above procedures, replace the toner cartridge with a new one (see Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One, on p. 11-8.) Check TCP/IP. The machines TCP/IP is not operating. Check the IP Address Settings in in (from the Additional Functions screen). (See Network Settings, in the e-Manual.) Check that all of the covers are closed. The cover is open. Check the cover and make sure that it is completely closed. Check the originals. The original is not correctly set in the feeder. Correctly set the original in the feeder. Clean the scan area. The feeder scanning area may be dirty. Clean the feeder scanning area (see Scanning Area, on p. 2-3), then press [OK]. Clear the output tray. Output paper is piled up on the output tray. Remove the output paper from the output tray.12-26 Error Messages Troubleshooting Message Description Action Drawer 1 is not inserted. Printing or copying could not be performed because the paper drawer (Drawer 1) was not set. Set the paper drawer (Drawer 1) and push it in as far as it will go. The copy or print will automatically resume. IEEE802.1X Error An unknown error has occurred. IEEE802.1X Error Unknown error has occurred. An unknown error occurred. The machine failed to analyze the server certificate sent from the RADIUS server. IEEE802.1X Error Cannot analyze the Certificate. The machine failed to analyze the server certificate sent from the RADIUS server. Check for any errors in the server certificate on the RADIUS server. IEEE802.1X Error Change the password. The password has expired. Set a new password. IEEE802.1X Error Check authentication settings. The specified authentication method of the machine does not match the authentication method of the RADIUS server. Make sure that the correct authentication method is specified on the machine. If the information set on the machine is inconsistent with that of the RADIUS server, specify the correct authentication method. IEEE802.1X Error No reply from the destination. An error occurred when communicating with the authenticator. Check for any errors in the authenticator (LAN switch) settings, as well as the RADIUS server settings. IEEE802.1X Error Set the correct Certificate info. IEEE802.1X Error Set the correct certificate information. The correct client authentication information (the key pair and certificate, user name and password, and the CA certificate) is not set. Check for incorrect settings in the authentication method and authentication information (the key pair and certificate, user name and password, and the CA certificate). IEEE802.1X Error The Certificate has expired. The server certificate sent from the RADIUS server has expired. Check the expiration date of the server certificate on the RADIUS server. IEEE802.1X Error The Certificate is incorrect. An error occurred when verifying the server certificate sent from the RADIUS server using the CA certificate. Check for any errors in the server certificate on the RADIUS server, as well as the CA certificate registered on the machine. Insert the toner cartridge all the way holding the right & left grips. A toner cartridge is not installed or not installed correctly. Install the toner cartridge correctly. Insert the XXX toner correctly. (XXX indicates Black, Yellow, Cyan, or Magenta.) The toner cartridge of the indicated color is not inserted. Properly insert the toner cartridge of the indicated color. For detailed instructions, see Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One, on p. 11-8. Insert the XXX toner in the location of the correct color. (XXX indicates Black, Yellow, Cyan, or Magenta.) The toner cartridge of the indicated color is not inserted in the correct location for that color. Insert the toner cartridge of the indicated color in the correct location for that color. For detailed instructions, see Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One, on p. 11-8.12-27 Error Messages Troubleshooting Message Description Action Insert the fixing unit. The fixing unit is not inserted. Insert the fixing unit. For detailed instructions, see When the Message Does Not Disappear, on p. 12-19. Insert the toner cartridge all the way holding the right & left grips. A toner cartridge is not installed or not installed correctly. Install the toner cartridge correctly. Load LTR to Drawer 1. (Depending on the paper supply and settings, the message displayed may vary.) The following did not match when copying, receiving faxes/I-faxes or E-mails: The paper size specified on the machine The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer Change the following so that they match: Paper size setting on the machine The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer (See Loading Paper on p. 2-10 or Setting Paper Size and Type, on p. 2-22.) The following did not match when printing: The paper size specified on the machine The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer To print on the paper of the size specified on the machines paper settings and on the printer driver: Load the paper of the size specified on the machine and on the printer driver and close the paper drawer. Printing will resume. To print on the paper of the size that is loaded in the paper drawer: 1. Delete the current job. 2. Change the paper size settings both on the printer driver and on the machine. 3. Retry printing. Load paper. The following did not match when printing: The paper size specified on the printer driver The paper size specified on the machine Change the following so that they match, and then retry printing (When you change the paper size setting on the printer driver, cancel the job on the machine.): The paper size setting on the printer driver The paper size setting on the machine No response from the destination. The server was not running when you tried to send. Check the destination. The network connection was lost when you tried to send. (Either you could not connect to the destination or the connection was lost before the job could complete.) Check the status of the network. A TCP/IP error occurred when you tried to send an e-mail or I-fax. Check that the network cables and connectors are properly connected. 12-28 Error Messages Troubleshooting Message Description Action No response from the server. Check the settings. The specified server settings are incorrect, or the server is not turned ON. Alternatively, the machines TCP/IP resources may be low. Wait for a while, and try browsing again. If you still fail, try selecting another server. Not enough TCP/IP resources. Wait a moment and perform the operation again. You cannot browse the network due to a lack of TCP/IP resources. This may be because documents have just been continuously sent or are being continuously sent through FTP or Windows (SMB). Wait for a while, and try browsing again. Paper diff. from set size/type. The following did not match when copying, receiving faxes/I-faxes or E-mails: The paper size specified on the machine The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer Change the following so that they match: Paper size setting on the machine The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer (See Loading Paper on p. 2-10 or Setting Paper Size and Type, on p. 2-22.) The following did not match when printing: The paper size specified on the printer driver The paper size specified on the machine The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer Change the following so that they match, and then retry printing: The paper size specified on the printer driver The paper size specified on the machine The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer (See Loading Paper on p. 2-10, Setting Paper Size and Type, on p. 2-22 or Printing Fundamentals, in the e-Manual.) 12-29 Error Messages Troubleshooting Message Description Action Paper diff. from set size/type. If the message appears after you have selected to the message : 1. Change the following so that they match: Paper size setting on the machine The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer (See Loading Paper on p. 2-10 or Setting Paper Size and Type, on p. 2-22.) 2. Remove the jammed paper inside the machine and close the front cover (see Inside of the Machine, on p. 12-13). The appropriate paper type for printing received faxes, I-faxes, or E-mails is not loaded. Load the appropriate type of paper (Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled Paper, Color) and change the paper type in . Paper is jammed in the fixing unit. Check the manual for instructions. A paper jam occurred in the fixing unit. Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions, see Fixing Unit, on p. 12-16. Perform the operation again. A transmission error has occurred because the line condition was poor. Check the line condition, then try again. Preparing... The machine is not ready for scanning. Wait until the machine is ready. Prepare a new toner cartridge. (XXX) (XXX indicates Black, Yellow, Cyan, or Magenta.) When a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Have a replacement toner cartridge ready so you can quickly replace the toner cartridge when it runs out. If the message is displayed while copying or printing (including manually printing a report), printing of the job that is currently being processed will continue. If the message is displayed when receiving a fax, the received fax is stored in the memory without being printed. If is set to , however, printing will continue. (Printing will also continue if a report is printed automatically.) See Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Is Low, on p. 5-107. 12-30 Error Messages Troubleshooting Message Description Action Press the OK key. [Stop] has been pressed while scanning the document using the feeder. Press [OK], then set the originals again. Printer Error Some kind of error has occurred in the machine. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it ON again. If the message persists, take a note of the error code that appears on the bottom left of the display, turn OFF the main power switch, disconnect the power cord, and contact Canon Customer Care Center. Received in memory. The machine temporarily received the data in memory because an error of some kind has occurred in the machine. This error message appears with one of the messages below. , , , , , This error message appears with another message. When the error is resolved, the received data will be printed out. For how to solve the problem, see the action for the messages displayed with it. Remove the jammed paper from inside the cover of the feeder. A paper jam occurred inside the cover of the feeder. Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions, see Original Jams, on p. 12-3.12-31 Error Messages Troubleshooting Message Description Action Remove the jammed paper from inside the front cover. A paper jam occurred inside the front cover. Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions, see Inside of the Machine, on p. 12-13. A paper jam occurred because the paper loaded in the paper drawer is different from the paper specified in and the printer driver screen. When printing, follow the instructions below. 1. Reload the correct size of paper into the paper drawer. (See Reloading the Paper, on p. 12-42.) 2. Remove the jammed paper and close the front cover. When removing the paper, be careful not to touch the transfer belt of the delivery feeder unit or toner cartridge. When copying, follow the instructions below. 1. Reload the correct size of paper into the paper drawer or stack bypass tray. (See Reloading the Paper, on p. 12-42.) 2. Remove the jammed paper and close the front cover. (See Inside of the Machine, on p. 12-13.) 3. Wait a while until the job resumes. Remove the jammed paper from XXX. (XXX indicates the location of the jam.) A paper jam occurred at the location shown on the display. Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions, see Clearing Jams, on p. 12-2. Remove the paper, and close the tray. A paper jam occurred in the stack bypass tray. Check the location of the paper jam and remove the jammed paper. Press the right Any key to display the next procedure. For detailed instructions, see Stack Bypass Tray, on p. 12-8. Replace the toner cartridge. (XXX) (XXX indicates Black, Yellow, Cyan, or Magenta.) When the toner runs out. Replace the toner cartridge of the indicated color. Incidentally, even if any of Yellow, Cyan or Magenta toner runs out, black and white printing can still be performed if Black toner remains.12-32 Error Messages Troubleshooting Message Description Action Search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the selected server. \ is used in the search criterion. Remove \ from the search criterion, and then search again. The combination of characters used in the search criterion does not constitute an acceptable search criterion. There is an unequal number of ( and ). * is not placed within ( ). Make sure that the characters for the search criterion are combined properly, and then search again. If is set to , characters other than ASCII Code (0x20-0x7E) are being used. Omit characters that cannot be used, and then search again. Set the IP Address. This machine is not set with an IP address. Specify the IP Address Settings in in in (from the Additional Functions screen), then turn the machines main power OFF and back ON again. (See Network Settings, or Setting Up the Machine, in the e-Manual.) Set the toner cartridge. (XXX) (XXX indicates either Black, Yellow, Cyan, or Magenta.) The toner cartridge of the indicated color is not set. Set the toner cartridge of the indicated color. For detailed instructions, see Replacing the Toner Cartridge with a New One, on p. 11-8. The counter has reached the set value. You cannot print because the set page limit for either scans, prints, or copies in the department ID management function has been reached. Contact your system manager. The memory is full. The machine is full of jobs. Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory. Divide the document stack or data into a few parts and try again one by one. Send the document with low resolution. When this message appears during using the feeder, the scanning document stops halfway. In this case, clear the paper jam from the feeder. 12-33 Error Messages Troubleshooting Message Description Action The memory is full. The number of TX/RX jobs that can be stored in memory reached the maximum. The maximum numbers of jobs that can be stored in memory are as follows (Based on the condition that the other party sends the fax by the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn/ Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn with ITU-T No. 1 Chart standard mode): Up to 70 jobs for sending or 90 jobs for receiving, 95 fax jobs including sending and receiving, or 75 e-mail and I-fax jobs for receiving. Wait for the machine to send any documents in memory. Also print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory. The number of search results has exceeded limits. If the desired destination is not displayed, change the search conditions and try again. The number of addresses that meet the search criteria exceeds the specified maximum number of addresses to search. Narrow down the search criteria, and then search again. Increase the maximum number of addresses to search. (See Network Settings, in the e-Manual.) The scan area is dirty. The feeders scanning area is dirty. Clean the feeders scanning area. This size cannot be used with 2-Sided unit modes. The paper size is not appropriate for a two-sided copy. Set the paper size to or , then load paper of the same size. Transmission has been suspended. Contact system manager. You tried to send e-mails or I-faxes when the machine is in the User ID Management with the e-mail address of the login user not registered. Use the Remote UI to register the e-mail address for each user when User ID Management is enabled. Turn off the main power on the right side of the machine. Description Some kind of error has occurred in the machine. Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for more than 10 seconds, then turn it ON again. If the message persists, write down the error code displayed on the bottom left side of the display, turn OFF the main power switch, disconnect the power cord, and contact Canon Customer Care Center. Wait a moment... This message appears when turning ON the main power switch, or when the machine is not ready for printing. Wait until the message disappears.12-34 Error Codes Troubleshooting Error Codes If a job or operation does not complete successfully, check the error code, and perform the necessary operations according to the error code displayed. You can check the error code on the Details screen when you select on the System Monitor screen. If a send, receive, or fax job does not complete successfully, the error code is printed in the RESULT column on the Activity Report, TX Report, and Fax Activity Report. Perform the necessary procedures according to the error code. For details on reports, see Introduction of the Machine, in the e-Manual. See the table below for individual error codes. Error Code Description Action #0001 Paper or originals are jammed. Remove any jammed paper or originals. (See Clearing Jams, on p. 12-2.) #0003 Communications that take longer than the preset time (64 minutes) caused the error. Reduce the resolution or divide the document into two or more parts, and then try sending the document again. (See Selecting Resolution, on p. 5-50.) When receiving a document, ask the sender to either reduce the resolution at which the document is scanned, or divide the document into two or more parts before sending it. 12-35 Error Codes Troubleshooting Error Code Description Action #0005 The recipient did not answer within 35 seconds. Confirm that the recipients machine is able to communicate, and try again. The recipients machine is not a G3 fax. Check the type of receiving machine with the receiving party. #0009 There is no paper. Load paper. (See Loading Paper, on p. 2-10.) The paper drawer is not correctly inserted into the machine. Insert the paper drawer properly. (See Loading Paper, on p. 2-10.) #0012 The document could not be sent because the recipients machine was out of paper. Ask the recipient to load paper into their fax machine. #0018 The recipients machine did not respond when your machine redialed. Confirm that the recipients machine is able to communicate, and then try again. The documents could not be sent because the recipients machine was busy. Confirm that the recipients machine is able to communicate, and then try again. The settings on your machine do not match the settings on the recipients machine. Check that the settings on your machine match those on the recipients machine, and that the recipients machine is able to communicate. Try sending again. No pause was included in the telephone number when sending a fax overseas. Insert a pause after the country code, or after the fax number of the recipient, and then dial the number again. (See Dialing an Overseas Number (With Pauses), on p. 5-22.) Change the Long Distance setting if you are sending documents to a destination stored in the Address Book or One-touch. (See Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book, on p. 3-2 or Storing/Editing One-Touch, on p. 3-32.) #0037 Documents could not be received because there is insufficient memory available. Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory. The data size exceeds the available memory. Reduce the data size by lowering the resolution or by changing the file format. #0059 Your transmission is canceled because the number you dialed was different from the number registered on the other partys fax machine. Check to see that the correct fax number is registered on the other partys fax machine. #0099 A job was interrupted when the Media To Print or Scan To Media function was being used. Try to execute the job if necessary. #0401 The USB memory is full or the maximum number of files that can be stored in the root directory (the top level of the directory tree in the USB memory) has been reached. Delete unnecessary files in the USB memory or organize the files in the root directory by moving existing files to a newly created folder.12-36 Error Codes Troubleshooting Error Code Description Action #0403 The job failed because the same file name existed. Generally, if the same file name exists, a file will be automatically renamed by adding a number, which ranges from 1 to 999, to the tail of its file name in order to avoid naming conflicts. However, this error occurred because the file with the same number already added to its file name existed. Rename the file, and then write the data again. #0404 The job failed because the write protect switch of the USB memory was ON. Turn OFF the write protect switch of the USB memory. #0406 The job failed because the medium was pulled out while the job was in progress. Confirm that the medium is properly inserted, and then write the data again. An error has occurred while data, such as image data, were being transferred to the medium. (The connected medium may be formatted with a file system that is not supported by the machine.) Check the status of the medium, or make sure that the medium is formatted with a file system supported by the machine (FAT16 or FAT32), and then try again. #0407 The length of the full path to the specified file (or folder) exceeded the supported limit. The limit of the length of the full path is 120. Change or shorten the file name to be written. #0408 The transfer of data has failed because the medium was pulled out during the transfer. Confirm that the medium is correctly inserted and then try the transfer again. An error has occurred while data, such as image data, were being transferred to the medium. Check the status of the medium, or make sure that the medium is formatted with a file system supported by the machine. #0703 The memory for image data is full when sending color documents. Wait a few moments, and then try sending again after other send jobs are complete. Erase documents stored in memory. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON. #0705 The send process was interrupted because the size of the image data being sent was larger than the size limit set in in in in (from the Additional Functions screen). Change the setting of the size limit in the in in in (from the Additional Functions screen). Select a lower resolution. If you are sending an I-fax, reduce the size of the data by decreasing the number of pages that contain images so that it will not exceed the size limit set in . When scanning, set to in . #0751 The server is not functioning. The network is down (the server is unable to connect to the network or was disconnected). Check the recipients address. Check that the network is up. 12-37 Error Codes Troubleshooting Error Code Description Action #0752 The SMTP server name for e-mail or I-fax is not correct. Start the Remote UI and make sure that the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network Settings matches the SMTP server address you checked in Network Settings, in the e-Manual. The domain name or e-mail address may not be set. Start the Remote UI and make sure that Domain Name in TCP/IP Settings under Network Settings is set correctly. Start the Remote UI and make sure that E-mail Address in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network Settings is set correctly. The mail server is not functioning. Ask the network administrator to check that the mail server is operating properly. The network is down. Ask the network administrator to check that the network is operating properly. While an e-mail message were being sent in color, some error occurred. Try sending several times. If the error persists, ask the network administrator to check that the network is operating properly. #0753 A TCP/IP error occurred while sending documents to a file server, or sending an e-mail message. (Socket, Select error, etc.) Check that the network cable is properly connected between the machine and your computer. Check that the is set to . Check that the of the file server destination is set correctly. Check that the is set correctly. Set to . Check the settings in Windows Firewall. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON. #0755 You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not functioning correctly. Check in in (from the Additional Functions screen). The IP address is not set. Check in in (from the Additional Functions screen). When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not assigned to the machine by the DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP server. After the machine is turned ON, communication with a network will not start until the time specified in in in (from the Additional Functions screen) elapses. Wait a few moments, and then try sending again. 12-38 Error Codes Troubleshooting Error Code Description Action #0801 A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the SMTP server to send an e-mail message. Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally, or check the network status. The SMTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination is not correct. Check the destination setting. An error occurred on the server side during transmission to a file server. Check that the file server is operating properly. The e-mail address is incorrect. Start the Remote UI and make sure that the E-mail Address in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network Settings is set correctly. #0802 The name of the SMTP server is incorrect. Start the Remote UI and make sure that SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network Settings matches the SMTP server address you checked in Network Settings, in the e-Manual. The domain name of the DNS server is incorrect. Start the Remote UI and make sure that Domain Name in TCP/IP Settings under Network Settings is set correctly. The name of the DNS server is incorrect. Start the Remote UI and make sure that Primary DNS Server Address and Secondary DNS Server Address in TCP/IP Settings under Network Settings are set correctly. Connection to the DNS server failed. Ask the network administrator to check that the DNS server is operating properly. #0804 You have no permission to access the folder. Check that the user name and password you specified match the user accounts (user name and password) registered to the computer (file server). #0806 An incorrect user name or password was specified for the sending of a file to a file server. Check that the user name and password you specified match the user accounts (user name and password) registered to the computer (file server). An incorrect destination was specified for the sending of an e-mail message or I-fax. Check the e-mail or I-fax address. #0808 A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the FTP server. Check that the FTP server is functioning normally. Check the network status. The FTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination is not correct. An error occurred on the server side during transmission. Check that the FTP server is functioning normally. Check the network status. Check the destination setting. Check the status and setting of the file server. 12-39 Error Codes Troubleshooting Error Code Description Action #0810 A POP (Post Office Protocol) server connection error occurred while receiving an I-fax. Check the POP Server name in in in (from the Additional Functions screen). Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally. Check the network status. The POP server returned an error during the connection. Start the Remote UI and make sure that POP Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network Settings matches the POP server address you checked in Network Settings, in the e-Manual. A timeout error occurred on the server while connecting to the POP server. Ask the network administrator to check that the mail server or the network is operating properly. #0813 The login name or password for access to the POP server is incorrect. Check that POP Address and POP Password in E-mail/I-Fax are set correctly. (See Network Settings in the e-Manual.) #0816 You have reached the quota for the number of pages you can scan for faxing. Reset or increase the page quota or contact your system administrator. #0818 You have received data that cannot be processed (cannot print the attached file). Check the settings and ask the sender to resend the data. #0819 You have received data that cannot be processed (MIME information is incorrect). Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data. The machine can receive only e-mails in plain text format. HTML e-mails cannot be received. #0820 You have received data that cannot be processed (BASE 64 or uuencode is incorrect). Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data. The machine can receive only e-mails in plain text format. HTML e-mails cannot be received. #0821 You have received data that cannot be processed (TIFF analysis error). Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data. The read job failed because TIFF or JPEG files were not supported or the image data was corrupted. Confirm that the supported file format is used, and then read data again. #0827 You have received data that cannot be processed (contains MIME information that is not supported). Check the settings, and then ask the sender to resend the data. #0828 You have received HTML data. Ask the sender to use a file format other than HTML, and then resend the data. #0829 Data that contains more than approximately 1,000 pages is received. (This error code may also appear when the machine receives corrupted data.) This machine can store up to approximately 1,000 pages of data in memory, but will delete any data that exceeds this limit. Ask the sender to resend the remaining pages. (If the received data is corrupted, ask the sender to resend the appropriate data.)12-40 Error Codes Troubleshooting Error Code Description Action #0839 The user name or password for the SMTP Authentication is incorrect. Start the Remote UI and make sure that SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network Settings matches the SMTP server address you checked in Network Settings, in the e-Manual. Start the Remote UI and enter the correct password for the SMTP Authentication in Password in E-mail/I-Fax Settings under Network Settings. If you do not know what your password is, check in the notification form issued by your ISP (Internet Service Provider) or consult the network administrator. #0853 The job was not able to be processed due to the reason why it was canceled from an application or operating system while the print data was being sent to this machine from a computer etc. You have sent the print data unsupported by the machine or sent corrupted print data. Check the settings, and then repeat the operation. #0859 An error occurred while compressing scanned originals. Check the scan settings, and then try scanning again.12-41 If a Message Such as is displayed Troubleshooting If a Message Such as size/type.> is displayed If all of the following do not match, a message such as is displayed: The paper size specified on the printer driver (Only when printing from a computer) The paper size specified in the menu on the machine The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer or stack bypass tray If such a message is displayed and you are unable to make a copy or print job, change the paper size in the items described above so that they all match. The following chart is a list of the messages. See Error Messages, on p. 12- 24 for details concerning the messages and remedies. Messages dsplayed when the paper szes do not match Message Cause Copy Load LTR to Drawer 1. (Depending on the paper supply and settings, the message displayed may vary.) The following did not match: The paper size specified on the machine The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer Paper diff. from set size/type. Remove the jammed paper from inside the front cover. The following did not match: The paper size specified on the machine The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer Print Load LTR to Drawer 1. (Depending on the paper supply and settings, the message displayed may vary.) The following did not match: The paper size specified on the machine The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer Paper diff. from set size/type. The following did not match: The paper size specified on the printer driver The paper size specified on the machine The size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer Load paper The following did not match when printing: The paper size specified on the printer driver The paper size specified on the machine Remove the jammed paper from inside the front cover. A paper jam occurred because the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer was different from that of the paper specified on the machine and printer driver. Load the correct size paper if the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer does not match. See Reloading the Paper, on p. 12-42 for instructions. Change paper size if the paper size specified on the machine does not match. See Changing the Paper Size Setting, on p. 12-42 for instructions. For print jobs, you need to specify the paper size from your computer. 12-42 If a Message Such as is displayed Troubleshooting Reloading the Paper 1 Load the correct size paper, then press [OK] to resume the job. The machine re-starts printing. See Loading Paper, on p. 2-10 for instructions on how to load paper. Changing the Paper Size Setting For the Stack Bypass Tray If you set the standard settings for stack bypass tray, follow the procedures below to change paper size. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press the right Any key to select . If you do not want to set the stack bypass standard settings, select , then press [OK], and press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.12-43 If a Message Such as is displayed Troubleshooting 6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper size, then press [OK]. You can select from the following paper sizes: , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , If you use A/B size paper, press the right Any key to select and select the paper size you want to use. 7 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper type, then press [OK]. You can select from the following paper types: , , , , , , , , , The selectable paper types vary depending on the paper size you have specified. The unavailable paper types are grayed out on the display. 8 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. For the Paper Drawer Follow this procedure to change the paper size setting. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].12-44 If a Message Such as is displayed Troubleshooting 4 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select or *, then press [OK]. * Only when the optional Paper Drawer (Paper Drawer 2) is attached. 5 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper size, then press [OK]. You can select from the following paper sizes: , , , , , , If you use A/B size paper, press the right Any key to select and perform the step above. 6 Use [], [] or (Scroll Wheel) to select paper type, then press [OK]. You can select from the following paper types: , , , , , 7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.12-45 If a Power Failure Occurs Troubleshooting If a Power Failure Occurs If power is suddenly lost due to an outage or accidental unplugging, a built-in battery retains the user data settings and the Address Book settings. Any sent or received documents stored in memory are backed up for about 60 minutes. During a power cut, functions are limited as follows: You cannot send, receive, copy, scan, or print documents. You may not be able to make telephone calls using an external telephone, depending on the type of telephone you use. You can receive telephone calls using an external telephone depending on the type of telephone you use. To fully charge the built-in battery, it takes approximately 2 hours after when the main power switch is ON. If the built-in battery is not fully charged, the data may not be saved properly. 12-46 If You Cannot Solve a Problem Troubleshooting If You Cannot Solve a Problem Customer Support (U.S.A.) If you cannot solve the problem after having referred to the information in this chapter, contact Canon Customer Care Center at 1-800-OK-CANON Monday through Friday between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. ET. On-line support is also available 24 hours a day at the website http://www.canontechsupport.com. Customer Support (Canada) Canon Canada Inc., off ers a full range of customer technical support options*: For step-by-step troubleshooting, e-mail technical support, the latest driver or document downloads, and answers to frequently asked questions, visit http://www.canon.ca/ Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still under warranty 1-800-652-2666 For the location of the authorized service facility nearest you, visit http://www.canon.ca/ or 1-800-652-2666 If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair options are available at the time of your call to the live technical support number above or via the website at http:// www.canon.ca/ * Support program specifics are subject to change without notice. 12-47 If You Cannot Solve a Problem Troubleshooting Please have the followng nformaton ready when you contact Canon: Product name Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn/Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn Serial number (on the label located on the top inside part of the front cover) Place of purchase Nature of problem Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results If the machine makes strange noises, emits smoke or odd odor, turn off the main power switch immediately, disconnect the power cord, and contact Canon Customer Care Center. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine yourself. Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited warranty. 12-48 If You Cannot Solve a Problem TroubleshootingM achine Settings This chapter explains how to change and check the machine settings. Machine Settings Chapter13 Machine Settings .......................................................13-2 Printing USERS DATA LIST ............................................. 13-2 Accessing the Setting Menu ......................................... 13-3 Setting Menu .............................................................13-5 Paper Settings .................................................................... 13-5 Volume Settings ................................................................ 13-6 Common Settings ............................................................. 13-6 Communications Settings ............................................. 13-8 Address Book Settings ..................................................13-10 Printer Settings ................................................................13-13 Timer Settings ..................................................................13-18 Adjustment/Cleaning ....................................................13-19 Report Settings ................................................................13-20 System Management Settings ...................................13-2113-2 Machine Settings M achine Settings Machine Settings You can adjust the machine settings from the Setting Menu to customize the way the machine works. To see the list of current settings, print out USERS DATA LIST. Printing USERS DATA LIST 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 4 Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 5 Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK].13-3 Machine Settings M achine Settings 6 Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. If you do not want to print the list, use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select , then press [OK]. 7 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen. 1 Press (Main Menu). 2 Press the right Any key to select . 3 Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select the menu you want to access, then press [OK]. Accessing the Setting Menu13-4 Machine Settings M achine Settings 4 Use [], [], or (Scroll Wheel) to select a submenu, then press [OK]. For details on the submenu, see Setting Menu, on p. 13-5. 5 To register the settings or go to a submenu item, press [OK]. 6 Press (Main Menu) to return to the Main Menu screen.13-5 Setting Menu M achine Settings Setting Menu The default settings are indicated in bold text. Depending on the country of purchase, some settings may not be available. The menus described in this section are based on the model Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn. Depending on the model of your machine, some settings may not be available. Paper Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Stack Bypass Paper (Std.) Off On p. 2-22 Paper Size Inch Size : LTR, LGL, STMT, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI, M-OFI, G-LTR, G-LGL, Custom Size, COM10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5 A/B Size : A4, A5, B5 Paper Type Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled Paper, Color, Bond, Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Transparencies, Labels, Envelope Drawer 1 p. 2-28 Paper Size Inch Size : LTR, LGL, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI, M-OFI A/B Size : A4, A5, B5 Paper Type Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled Paper, Color, Bond, Heavy 1 Drawer 2* Paper Size Inch Size : LTR, LGL, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI, M-OFI A/B Size : A4, A5, B5 Paper Type Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled Paper, Color, Bond, Heavy 1 Custom Size Size 1 Size 2 p. 2-26 * Only when the Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 (Optional) is attached. 13-6 Setting Menu M achine Settings Volume Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Monitor Volume Settings Volume Key Settings Priority Screen Settings Priority e-Manual Introduction of the Machine Audible Tones Incoming Ring Off On (1 to 3)(1) Entry Tone Off On (1 to 3)(1) Error Tone Off On (1 to 3)(1) TX Done Tone Off On (1 to 3)(1) Receive Done Tone Off On (1 to 3)(1) Print Done Tone Off On (1 to 3)(1) Scan Done Tone Off On (1 to 3)(1) Common Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Initial Function Settings e-Manual Introduction of the Machine Select Initial Function Main Menu, Copy, Send/Fax, Scan to Store, Direct Print* Set System Monitor to Def. Off On Status Monitor Device Off On Register Custom Key p. 1-8 Key 1 Copy, Send/Fax, Fax, E-mail, I-Fax, File Server, Send Log, Address Book, Search LDAP Server, Favorites, One-touch, Scan to Store, Store on Memory, Remote Scan, Direct Print* Key 2 Copy, Send/Fax, Fax, E-mail, I-Fax, File Server, Send Log, Address Book, Search LDAP Server, Favorites, One-touch, Scan to Store, Store on Memory, Remote Scan, Direct Print*13-7 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Brightness Adjustment Darker - Brighter (5) e-Manual Introduction of the Machine Reverse Color Display Off On Auto Clear Settings Selected Function Initial Function Inch Entry Off On Auto Drawer Selection Copy Stack Bypass Off On Drawer 1 Off On Drawer 2 Off On Printer Stack Bypass Off On Drawer 1 Off On Drawer 2 Off On Receive Stack Bypass Off On Drawer 1 Off On Drawer 2 Off On Other Stack Bypass Off On Drawer 1 Off On Drawer 2 Off On Sleep Mode Energy Use Low High 13-8 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Paper Feed Method Switch e-Manual Introduction of the Machine Stack Bypass Speed Priority Print Side Priority Drawer 1 Speed Priority Print Side Priority Drawer 2 Speed Priority Print Side Priority Language Switch Off On Error when Feeder is Dirty Off On Initialize Common Settings No Yes * Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn. Communications Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Common Settings TX Settings Register Unit Name Max. 24 characters p. 5-14 Data Compression Ratio High Ratio Normal Low Ratio e-Manual Scan E-mail Retry Times 0 to 5 Times (3) e-Manual Fax Scan E-mail Change Send Func. Mode Register Initialize e-Manual Fax Scan E-mail TX Terminal ID On p. 5-89 Printing Position Inside Outside Telephone # Mark FAX TEL Color Send Gamma Value Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.2 e-Manual Scan E-mail Sharpness Low - High (0) p. 5-9213-9 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page PDF (Compact) Img. Quality e-Manual Scan E-mail Text/Photo, Photo Mode Data Size Priority Normal Image Quality Priority Text Mode Data Size Priority Normal Image Quality Priority Default Screen for Send Favorites One-touch Default Screen p. 5-94 Initialize TX Settings No Yes p. 5-96 RX Settings 2-Sided Print Off On p. 5-100 Receive Reduction Off On p. 5-102 RX Reduction Auto Fixed Reduction Reduce % 97%, 95%, 90%, 75% Reduce Direction Vertical and Horizontal Vertical Only Received Page Footer Off On p. 5-105 Toner Out Continuous Print Off On p. 5-107 YCbCr Receive Gamma Val. Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.2 e-Manual E-mail Fax Settings User Settings Register Unit Telephone # Max. 20 characters p. 5-16 Tel. Line Type Selection p. 5-13Manual Pulse Tone Offhook Alarm Off On * Not functional for this machine. TX Settings ECM TX Off On p. 5-7613-10 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Set Pause Time 1 to 15 Seconds (2) e-Manual Fax Auto-redial Off On p. 5-80 Redial Times 1 to 10 Times (2) Redial Interval 2 to 99 Minutes (2) TX Error Redial Off All Pages Error and 1st Page Check Tone Before Sending Off On p. 5-83 RX Settings ECM RX Off On p. 5-109 Reception Mode Selection Auto RX Fax/Tel Auto Switch Manual RX Answer Mode DRPD. Select Fax p. 5-9 Incoming Ring Off On 1 to 99 Times (2) p. 5-111 Remote RX Off On 00 to 99 (25) p. 5-113 Manual/Auto Switch Off On 1 to 99 Seconds (15) p. 5-115 RX Restriction Off On p. 5-117 Address Book Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Register Address* Fax p. 3-2 Register Name Max. 16 characters Destination Registration Max. 40 characters ECM TX Off On Sending Speed 33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps Long Distance Domestic, Long Distance (1), Long Distance (2), Long Distance (3)13-11 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page E-mail p. 3-10Register Name Max. 16 characters Destination Registration Max. 120 characters I-Fax p. 3-16Register Name Max. 16 characters Destination Registration Max. 120 characters File p. 3-18 Register Name Max. 16 characters Destination Registration FTP, Windows (SMB), Windows (SMB): Browse Host Name FTP: Max. 47 characters Windows (SMB): Max. 120 characters Folder Path Max. 120 characters User Name Max. 24 characters Password FTP: Max. 24 characters Windows (SMB): Max. 14 characters Group p. 3-24Register Name Max. 16 characters Destination Registration Max. 299 destinations Search LDAP Server p. 3-7 p. 3-13 Display Name Max. 16 characters Display Destination When a fax number is selected from the search results: Max. 40 characters When an e-mail address is selected from the search results: Max. 120 characters ECM TX Off On Sending Speed 33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps Long Distance Domestic, Long Distance (1), Long Distance (2), Long Distance (3)13-12 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Register One-touch Fax p. 3-32 Register Name Max. 16 characters Register One-touch Name Max. 12 characters Destination Registration Max. 40 characters ECM TX Off On Sending Speed 33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps Long Distance Domestic, Long Distance (1), Long Distance (2), Long Distance (3) E-mail p. 3-40 Register Name Max. 16 characters Register One-touch Name Max. 12 characters Destination Registration Max. 120 characters I-Fax p. 3-46 Register Name Max. 16 characters Register One-touch Name Max. 12 characters Destination Registration Max. 120 characters File p. 3-49 Register Name Max. 16 characters Register One-touch Name Max. 12 characters Destination Registration FTP, Windows (SMB), Windows (SMB): Browse Host Name FTP: Max. 47 characters Windows (SMB): Max. 120 characters Folder Path Max. 120 characters User Name Max. 24 characters Password FTP: Max. 24 characters Windows (SMB): Max. 14 characters Group p. 3-55 Register Name Max. 16 characters Register One-touch Name Max. 12 characters Destination Registration Max. 299 destinations (Max. 199 destinations for the Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn)13-13 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Search LDAP Server p. 3-37 p. 3-43 Display Name Max. 16 characters Display Destination When a fax number is selected from the search results: Max. 40 characters When an e-mail address is selected from the search results: Max. 120 characters ECM TX Off On Sending Speed 33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps Long Distance Domestic, Long Distance (1), Long Distance (2), Long Distance (3) * Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn. Printer Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Number of Copies 1 to 999 Copies (1) e-Manual Print 2-Sided 2-Sided 1-Sided p. 7-11 Paper Feed e-Manual Print Default Paper Size LTR, LGL, STMT, EXEC, FLSC, OFI, B-OFI, M-OFI, G-LTR, G-LGL, COM10, Monarch, DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5, A4, A5, B5 Default Paper Type Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled Paper, Color, Bond, Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Transparencies, Labels, Envelope Paper Size Override - Off - On Print Quality Gradation Level High Gradation 1 High Gradation 2 Toner Density Cyan (C) Lighter - Darker (0) Magenta (M) Lighter - Darker (0) Yellow (Y) Lighter - Darker (0) Black (Bk) Lighter - Darker (0)13-14 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Save Toner* Off On e-Manual Print Line Control Resolution Priority Gradation Priority Layout Binding Location Long Edge Short Edge Unit of Measure Millimeter Inch Margin -1.97 to +1.97 inch (0.00) (-50.0 to +50.0 mm (0.0)) Auto Continue Off On Collate Off On Timeout Off Timeout (5 to 300 seconds) (15) Personality* Auto PS PCL Mode Priority* Off PS PCL Auto Select* PS Off On PCL Off On Color Mode Auto Detect Color Black and White Gradation Settings Gradation Off Smooth 1 Smooth 2 Graphics Off On Image Off On Compressed Image Output Output Display Error 13-15 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Initialize Printer Settings No Yes e-Manual Print PCL Settings* Paper Save Off On Orientation Portrait Landscape Font Number 0 to 104 (0) Point Size 4.00 to 999.75 point (12) Pitch 0.44 to 99.99 cpi (10) Form Lines 5 to 128 Lines (60) Symbol Set ARABIC8, DESKTOP, GREEK8, HEBREW7, HEBREW8, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17, ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, ISOCYR, ISOGRK, ISOHEB, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, LEGAL, MATH8, MCTEXT, MSPUBL, PC775, PC8*, PC850, PC851, PC852, PC862, PC864, PC866, PC8DN, PC8GRK, PC8TK, PC1004, PIFONT, PSMATH, PSTEXT, ROMAN8, VNINTL, VNMATH, VNUS, WIN30, WINARB, WINBALT, WINCYR, WINGRK, WINL1, WINL2, WINL5 Custom Paper Size Setting Off On Unit of Measure Millimeter Inch X dimension 3.00 to 8.50 inch (8.50) (76.2 to 216.0 mm (216.0)) Y dimension 5.00 to 14.00 inch (14.00) (127.0 to 356.0 mm (356.0)) Append CR to LF Yes No Enlarge A4 Print Width Off On Halftones Off On Text Resolution Gradation Graphics Resolution Gradation Image Resolution Gradation 13-16 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page RGB Source Profile e-Manual Print Text sRGB Gamma 1.5 Gamma 1.8 Gamma 2.4 Graphics sRGB Gamma 1.5 Gamma 1.8 Gamma 2.4 Image sRGB Gamma 1.5 Gamma 1.8 Gamma 2.4 Output Profile Text Normal Photo Graphics Normal Photo Image Normal Photo Matching Method Text Perceptual Saturation Colorimetric Graphics Perceptual Saturation Colorimetric Image Perceptual Saturation Colorimetric Gray Compensation Text Off On Graphics Off On Image Off On CMS (Matching) Selection Printer Host 13-17 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page CMS (Matching) / Gamma e-Manual Print Text Gamma CMS Graphics Gamma CMS Image Gamma CMS Gamma Correction Text 1.0, 1.4, 1.8, 2.2 Graphics 1.0, 1.4, 1.8, 2.2 Image 1.0, 1.4, 1.8, 2.2 Advanced Smoothing Advanced Smoothing Off Smooth 1 Smooth 2 Graphics Off On Text Off On PS Settings* Job Timeout 0 to 3600 seconds (0) Wait Timeout 0 to 3600 seconds (300) Print PS Errors Off On RGB Source Profile sRGB Gamma 1.5 Gamma 1.8 Gamma 2.4 CMYK Simulation Profile US Web Ctd(Canon) Euro Standard Use Grayscale Profile Off On Output Profile Normal Photo TR Normal TR Photo Matching Method Perceptual Saturation Colorimetric 13-18 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page RGB Pure Black Process Off On e-Manual Print CMYK Pure Blk Process Off On Pure Black Text Off On Halftones Error Diffusion Off On Text Resolution Gradation Graphics Resolution Gradation Image Resolution Gradation Advanced Smoothing Advanced Smoothing Off Smooth 1 Smooth 2 Graphics Off On Text Off On Toner Vol. Adjustment Normal Gradation * Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn. Timer Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Date & Time Settings Current Time Settings MM/DD/YYYY p. 5-12 Time Zone Settings GMT-12:00 to GMT+12:00 (GMT-5:00) e-Manual Introduction of the Machine Daylight Saving Time Set. Off On p. 1-24 Auto Sleep Time* Off On (3 to 240 minutes) (15) p. 1-22 Auto Clear Time 0=Off, 1 to 9 minutes (2) p. 1-23 * We recommend that you use this option in the default setting.13-19 Setting Menu M achine Settings Adjustment/Cleaning Item Settings Applicable Page Auto Gradation Correction e-Manual Maintenance Full Correction Test Print 1 Quick Correction Start Copy Image Correction Test Print 1 Feeder Dirty Auto Correct. Off On First Calibration Off On ACS Function Adjustment Feeder Color Priority - B&W Priority (0) Platen Glass Color Priority - B&W Priority (0) Color Black Char. Process Feeder Color Priority - B&W Priority (0) Platen Glass Color Priority - B&W Priority (0) Image Special Processing Off Level 1 Level 2 Paper Length Confirmation Off On Special Mode P Off On Fixing Unit Cleaning Start Cleaning p. 11-3 Feeder Cleaning Start p. 11-513-20 Setting Menu M achine Settings Report Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Settings e-Manual Introduction of the Machine TX Report Off On Only When Error Occurs Display Send Original Off On Activity Report Auto Print Off On Send/Receive Separate Off On Daily Activity Rep. Time Off On RX Report Off On Only When Error Occurs Fax Activity Report Auto Print Off On Send/Receive Separate Off On Daily Activity Rep. Time Off On Print List Address Book List Address Book* No Yes One-touch No Yes Users Data List No Yes p. 13-2 * Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.13-21 Setting Menu M achine Settings System Management Settings Item Settings Applicable Page System Manager Info. Settings e-Manual Security System Mgmt. Dept. ID Max. 7 digits (7654321) System Mgmt. Password Max. 7 digits (7654321) System Manager Name Max. 32 characters Device Info. Settings p. 1-18Device Name Max. 32 characters Location Information Max. 32 characters Dept. ID Management Off On e-Manual Security Register Dept. ID/Pass. Register Dept. ID Max. 7 characters Password Max. 7 characters Limit On/Off & Page Limit Total Print Limit Off On (0 to 999999)(0) Total Color Print Limit Off On (0 to 999999)(0) Total Black Print Limit Off On (0 to 999999)(0) Color Copy Limit Off On (0 to 999999)(0) Color Scan Limit Off On (0 to 999999)(0) Color Print Limit Off On (0 to 999999)(0) Black Copy Limit Off On (0 to 999999)(0) Black Scan Limit Off On (0 to 999999)(0) Black Print Limit Off On (0 to 999999)(0) 13-22 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Page Totals Total Prints, Total Color Print, Total Black Prints, Color Copy, Color Scan, Color Print, Black Copy, Black Scan, Black Print e-Manual Security Print List All, Total Print Only, Color Only, Black Only All Clear No Yes Allow Unknown ID Printing Off On Allow Unknown ID R. Scan Off On Allow Black Copy Jobs Off On User ID Management Off On Network Settings e-Manual Network Settings TCP/IP Settings IPv4 Settings IP Address Settings Manual Settings Off On IP Address IP Address (0.0.0.0) Subnet Mask IP Address (0.0.0.0) Gateway Address IP Address (0.0.0.0) Obtain Automatically DHCP BOOTP RARP PING Command IP Address (0.0.0.0) IP Address Range Settings Off On Register Single Address IP Address (0.0.0.0) Multiple Destinations Max. 10 IPv4 Addresses DNS Settings DNS Server Settings Primary DNS Server IP Address (0.0.0.0) Secondary DNS Server IP Address (0.0.0.0) DNS Host/Domain Name13-23 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Host Name Max. 47 characters (Canon****** (****** represents the last six digits of a MAC address)) e-Manual Network Settings Domain Name Max. 47 characters DNS Dynamic Update Set. Off On IPv6 Settings Use IPv6 Off On Stateless Address Settings Off On Manual Address Settings Off On Manual Address IP Address Prefix Length 0 to 128 (64) Default Router Address IP Address Use DHCPv6 Off On PING Command IPv6 address IP Address Host Name Max. 47 characters IP Address Range Settings Off On Register Single Address IP Address Multiple Destinations Max. 10 IPv6 Addresses Prefix Address IP Address DNS Settings DNS Server Settings Primary DNS Server IP Address Secondary DNS Server IP Address DNS Host/Domain Name Use Same Host/ Domain as IPv4 Off On Host Name Max. 47 characters (Canon****** (****** represents the last six digits of a MAC address))13-24 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Domain Name Max. 47 characters e-Manual Network Settings DNS Dynamic Update Set. Off On Manual Address Regist. Off On Register Stateful Address Off On WINS Configuration Off On WINS Server Address IP Address (0.0.0.0) LPD Print Settings Off On RAW Print Settings Off On Use Bidirectional Off On WSD Print Settings Use WSD Print Off On Use WSD Browsing Off On Use Multicast Discovery Off On SNTP Settings Off On Polling Interval 1 to 48 hours (24) NTP Server Address Max. 47 characters NTP Server Check Start Use PASV Mode for FTP Off On FTP Extension Off On Certificate Settings Key and Certificate List Certificate Details Displays Version, Serial No., Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start, Validity End, Issuer, Public Key, Cert Thumbprint Erase No Yes 13-25 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Display Use Location Displays what the key pair is being used for e-Manual Network Settings CA Certificate List Certificate Details Displays Version, Serial No., Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start, Validity End, Issuer, Public Key, Cert Thumbprint Erase No Yes Register Key and Cert. Register Key Name Max. 24 characters Password Max. 24 characters Erase No Yes CA Cert. Registration Register No Yes Erase No Yes Use HTTP Off On Port Number Settings LPD 1 to 65535 (515) RAW 1 to 65535 (9100) HTTP 1 to 65535 (80) SMTP Receive 1 to 65535 (25) POP3 Receive 1 to 65535 (110) FTP Sending 1 to 65535 (21) SMTP Send 1 to 65535 (25) SNMP 1 to 65535 (161) WSD 1 to 65535 (3702)13-26 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Proxy Settings Not functional for this machine. Receiving MAC Address Off On e-Manual Network Settings Confirm Dept. ID Password Off On SMB Settings Off On Server Name Max. 15 characters Workgroup Name Max. 15 characters Comment Max. 48 characters Use LM Announce Off On SNMP Settings Off On Community Name 1 Max. 15 characters (public) Community Name 2 Max. 15 characters Writable SNMP1 Off On Writable SNMP2 Off On Printer Mgt. Info from Host Off On Dedicated Port Settings On Off Startup Time Settings 0 to 300 seconds (0) Ethernet Driver Settings Auto Detect On Off Communication Mode Half Duplex Full Duplex Ethernet Type 10 Base-T 100 Base-TX 13-27 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page E-mail/I-Fax e-Manual Network Settings SMTP Receive Off On POP Off On SMTP Server Max. 47 characters E-mail Address Max. 64 characters POP Server Max. 47 characters POP Address Max. 32 characters POP Password Max. 32 characters POP Interval 0 to 99 minutes (0) Authentication/ Encryption POP Auth. Before Send Off On SMTP Authentication Off On User Name Max. 64 characters Password Max. 32 characters IEEE802.1X Settings Off On Login Name Max. 24 characters Use TLS Off On Key and Certificate Set as Default Key No Yes Certificate Details Displays Version, Serial No., Signature Algorithm, Issue Destination, Validity Start, Validity End, Issuer, Public Key, Cert Thumbprint Display Use Location Displays what the key pair is being used for13-28 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Use TTLS Off On e-Manual Network Settings TTLS Set. (TTLS Internal Protocol) MSCHAPv2 PAP Use PEAP Off On LoginName as UserName Off On User Name Max. 24 characters Password Max. 24 characters Communication Settings E-mail/I-Fax Settings Send Data Size Limit 0 to 99 MB (3) e-Manual Fax E-mail Divide TX Data Oversize Off On Default Subject Max. 40 characters (Attached Image) Fax Settings Send Start Speed 33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps p. 5-98 Receive Start Speed 33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps p. 5-119 Memory Lock Settings Off On p. 5-121 Memory Lock Password Max. 7 digits Report Print Off On Memory Lock Time Settings Do Not Specify Specify Select Country/Region Brazil, Canada, United States, Mexico, Others Starter Guide Set Up the Machine13-29 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Forwarding Settings Register p. 5-128 Fowarding Cond. Name Max. 50 characters Forwarding Conditions Settings Fax I-Fax Forwarding Condition disregard, Do Not Exist*, equals, differs from, begins with, ends with, contains, does not contain * Only when is selected in Conditions Settings>. Forwarding Destination Select from the list of registered addresses File Format When is selected in : TIFF PDF When is selected in : TIFF(Black)/PDF(Color) TIFF(Black)/JPEG(Color) PDF PDF(Black)/JPEG(Color) Divide Pages Off On Forward w/o Condition p. 5-132 Forwarding Without Conditions Fax I-Fax Forwarding Destination Select from the list of registered addresses File Format When is selected in : TIFF PDF When is selected in : TIFF(Black)/PDF(Color) TIFF(Black)/JPEG(Color) PDF PDF(Black)/JPEG(Color) Divide Pages Off On 13-30 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Erase No Yes p. 5-136 Print List No Yes p. 5-137 Details/Edit Same as p. 5-138 Store/Print When Fwding. p. 5-141 Print Image Off On Only When Error Occurs Store Image to Memory Do Not Store Only When Error Occurs Remote UI Off On e-Manual Security Restrict the Send Function Address Book Password Max. 7 digits Restrict New Addresses Off On Allow Fax Driver TX Off On Restrict Sending From Log Off On Confirm Entered Fax No. Off On Restrict Seq. Broadcast Off Broadcast Confirmation Prohibit Broadcast Auto Online/Offline Auto Online Off On Auto Offline Off On Register LDAP Server e-Manual Network Settings Register Server Name Max. 24 characters Server Address Max. 47 characters Loc. to Start Search Max. 120 characters Port Number 1 to 65535 (389) Search Dest. Limit 1 to 1000 (100) Search Timeout 30 to 300 seconds (60)13-31 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Login Information e-Manual Network Settings Do Not Use Server LDAP Version and Char. Code Ver. 3 (UTF-8) Ver. 2 (UTF-8) Ver. 2 (SJIS) Ver. 2 (EUC) Ver. 2 (JIS) Ver. 2 (ISO8859) Use User Name Max. 120 characters Password Max. 24 characters Display Auth. Screen Off On Server LDAP Version and Char. Code Ver. 3 (UTF-8) Ver. 2 (UTF-8) Ver. 2 (SJIS) Ver. 2 (EUC) Ver. 2 (JIS) Ver. 2 (ISO8859) Use (Sec. Auth.): Ver 3 (UTF-8) User Name Max. 120 characters Password Max. 24 characters Domain Name Max. 120 characters Display Auth. Screen Off On Details/Edit Same as Erase No Yes Print List No Yes Reg/Edit LDAP Search Attributes Not Registered 1 Display Name Max. 11 characters Attribute Name Max. 64 characters Not Registered 2 Display Name Max. 11 characters Attribute Name Max. 64 characters13-32 Setting Menu M achine Settings Item Settings Applicable Page Job Log Display Off On e-Manual Security Memory Media Store Log Do Not Retain Retain USB Device Off On Dept. ID/User Name Display Off On PDL Selection (PnP) UFRII LT, PCL5c, PCL6, FAX, PS3 e-Manual Introduction of the Machine Memory Media Settings e-Manual Security Store on Memory Media Off On Direct Print* Off On Update Firmware This function is used only when it is necessary to update the firmware. Start Setup Guide No Yes e-Manual Introduction of the Machine * Only for the Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn.14-1 A ppendix Specifications .............................................................14-2 General ................................................................................. 14-2 Copier .................................................................................... 14-3 Printer ................................................................................... 14-3 Facsimile .............................................................................. 14-4 Telephone ............................................................................ 14-4 Send ....................................................................................... 14-5 Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 (Optional) ..................... 14-6 Index ...........................................................................14-7 Appendix Chapter1414-2 Specifications A ppendix Specifications General Type Personal Desktop Power Source 120 V-127 V, 60 Hz (Power requirements differ depending on the country in which you purchased the product.) Power Consumption Max: Less than 1300 W, 1350 W (with optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1) Weight Approx. 96 lb (44 kg) (including toner cartridges) Dimensions 21 1/2" (W) 20 3/4" (D) 24 7/8" (H) (546 mm (W) 527 mm (D) 632 mm (H)) 21 1/2" (W) 21 3/8" (D) 36 7/8" (H) (546 mm (W) 543 mm (D) 936 mm (H)) (with optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1) Installation Space 21 1/2" (W) 44 7/8" (D) 31 1/4" (H) (546 mm (W) 1140 mm (D) 792 mm (H)) (with drawer pulled out and with back cover and feeder open) 21 1/2" (W) 44 7/8" (D) 43 1/8" (H) (546 mm (W) 1140 mm (D) 1095 mm (H)) (with optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 attached, drawer pulled out, and back cover and feeder open) Environmental Conditions Temperature: 50F86F (10C30C) Humidity: 20%80% RH (no condensation) Display Languages ENGLISH/FRENCH/SPANISH/PORTUGUESE Acceptable Documents See Originals Requirements, on p. 2-2. Acceptable Paper Stock See Paper Requirements, on p. 2-7. Printable Area See Printable Area, on p. 2-9. Scanning Area See Scanning Area, on p. 2-3.14-3 Specifications A ppendix Copier Scanning Resolution 600 dpi 600 dpi Printing Resolution 600 dpi 600 dpi Magnification 1:1 1.0%, 1:2.00, 1:1.29, 1:0.78, 1:0.64, 1:0.50 Zoom 0.502.00, 1% increments Copy Speed Direct: Color: 22 cpm (LTR), Black: 22 cpm (LTR) No. of Copies Max. 99 copies Warm-Up Time less than 60 sec*. (from when main power switch is turned on until standby display appears, when temperature is 68F (20C) and humidity is 65%) * Warm-up time may differ depending on the condition and environment of the machine. First Print Time Platen glass: Less than 12.5 sec. (LTR) Feeder: Less than 18.5 sec. (LTR) Printer Printing Method Indirect electrostatic method (On-demand fixing) Paper Handling Paper drawer: 250 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m2)) x 1 Stack Bypass tray: 100 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m2)) Paper Delivery 250 sheets (20 lb (75 g/m2)) Print Speed Direct: Color: 22 cpm (LTR), Black: 22 cpm (LTR) Printing Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi (2400 dpi enhanced x 600 dpi) Number of Tones 256 Toner Cartridge See Toner Cartridges, on p. 1-15.14-4 Specifications A ppendix Facsimile Applicable Line Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)*1 Compatibility G3 Data Compression Schemes MH, MR, MMR, JBIG Modem Speed 33.6 Kbps Automatic fallback Transmission Speed Approx. 3 seconds/page*2 at 33.6 Kbps, ECM-JBIG, transmitting from the memory Transmission/Reception Memory More than 1000 pages*2 (total pages of transmission/reception) Fax Resolution <200 100 dpi>: 203 pels/in. 98 lines/in. (8 pels/mm 3.85 lines/mm) <200 200 dpi>: 203 pels/in. 196 lines/in. (8 pels/mm 7.7 lines/mm) <200 400 dpi>: 203 pels/in. 391 lines/in. (8 pels/mm 15.4 lines/mm) <400 400 dpi>: 406 pels/in. 391 lines/in. (16 pels/mm 15.4 lines/mm) Dialing Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn: Speed dialing Address Book dialing (100 destinations) One-touch speed dialing (200 destinations) Group dialing (299 destinations) Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn: Speed dialing One-touch speed dialing (200 destinations) Group dialing (199 destinations) Regular dialing (with numeric keys) Automatic redialing Manual redialing (Recalling from the log.) Sequential broadcast Color imageCLASS MF9280Cdn: 332 destinations Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn: 232 destinations TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification) Receiving Automatic reception Remote reception by telephone (Default ID: 25) Report ACTIVITY REPORT (after every 40 transactions) TX (Transmission)/RX (Reception) REPORT FAX ACTIVITY REPORT (after every 40 transactions) *1 The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently supports 28.8 Kbps modem speed or lower, depending on telephone line conditions. *2 Based on ITU-T Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode. Telephone Connection External telephone/answering machine (CNG detecting signal)/data modem14-5 Specifications A ppendix Send Send to file server Communication Protocol FTP (TCP/IP), SMB (TCP/IP) Data Format TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Color) (Compact) Resolution TIFF, PDF (B&W): 100 100 dpi, 150 150 dpi, 200 100 dpi, 200 200 dpi, 200 400 dpi, 300 300 dpi, 400 400 dpi, 600 600 dpi JPEG, PDF (color): 100 100 dpi, 150 150 dpi, 200 200 dpi, 300 300 dpi, 600 600 dpi PDF (color) (compact): 300 300 dpi System Environment Windows XP Professional/Home Edition, Windows 2000 Server/Professional (SP1 or later), Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Solaris Version 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Red Hat Linux 7.2 Interface 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T Color Mode Color, B&W (black and white) Original Type Text, Text/Photo, Photo E-mail and I-Fax Features Communication Protocol SMTP, POP3, I-FAX (Simple mode) Data Format TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Compact) (Color) Resolution I-FAX: 200 100 dpi, 200 200 dpi TIFF, PDF (B&W): 100 100 dpi, 150 150 dpi, 200 100 dpi, 200 200 dpi, 200 400 dpi, 300 300 dpi, 400 400 dpi, 600 600 dpi JPEG, PDF (color): 100 100 dpi, 150 150 dpi, 200 200 dpi, 300 300 dpi, 600 600 dpi PDF (color) (compact): 300 300 dpi System Environment Windows XP Professional/Home Edition, Windows 2000 Server/Professional (SP1 or later), Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Solaris Version 2.6 or later, Mac OS X, Red Hat Linux 7.2 Original Size E-mail: LTR, LGL, A4, A5, B5 I-Fax: LTR, LGL*1, A4, A5, B5 *1 Sent as LTR Mail Forwarding Server Software Sendmail 8.93 or later (UNIX) Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows) The following versions are supported: Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later Microsoft Exchange Server 2000 Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 * Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 is not supported. Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows) 14-6 Specifications A ppendix Send Mail Receiving Server Software Qpopper 2.53 or later (UNIX) Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows) The following versions are supported: Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later Microsoft Exchange Server 2000 Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 * Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 is not supported. Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows) Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 (Optional) Paper Feeding System 500 sheets 1 drawer (20 lb (75 g/m2)) Acceptable Paper Stock See Paper Requirements, on p. 2-7. Power Source From the main unit Dimensions 17 3/8" (W) 21 3/8" (D) 12" (H) (440 mm (W) 543 mm (D) 304 mm (H)) Weight Approx. 28.7 lb (13 kg) Specifications are subject to change without notice.14-7 Index A ppendix Index Numerics 1 to 2-Sided 4-23, 4-24 2-Sided Copying 4-23 2-Sided Original 5-56 2-Sided Printing 7-11 2 to 1-Sided 4-23, 4-28 2 to 2-Sided 4-23, 4-26 AlphabetGroup A Address Book Erasing 3-30 Registering e-mail addresses 3-10 Registering fax numbers 3-2 Registering group addresses 3-24 Registering I-fax addresses 3-16 Address Book Settings 13-10 Address details Checking/editing 3-27, 3-59 Adjustment/Cleaning 13-19 Any key 1-7 B Back cover 1-4 Clearing jams 12-18 [Back] key 1-7 Base Color Copy 4-21 Fax 5-52 Basic sending method Scanning documents to a file server 8-6 Scanning documents to a USB memory 8-8 Sending E-Mail Documents 6-5 Sending faxes 5-17 Sending I-faxes 5-25 Sending PC faxes 5-27 C Canceling Sending e-mail documents 6-7 Sending fax documents 5-29 Canceling Copy Jobs 4-6 Canceling Print Jobs 7-28 CF card slot 1-10 Change Paper Size If displayed 12-41 Checking Fax reception status 5-148 Fax transmission/reception log 5-150 Fax transmission status 5-147 Checking Current Settings 4-63 Checking Print Jobs 7-27 Checking Print Logs 7-29 Checking the device information 1-18 Clean Earth Campaign 11-13 Cleaning Exterior 11-2 Feeder Automatically 11-5 Fixing Unit 11-3 Platen Glass 11-414-8 Index A ppendix Clearing jams 12-2 Back cover 12-18 Delivery Feeder Unit 12-22 Duplex unit 12-6 Inside of the machine 12-13 Original jams 12-3 Paper delivery tray 12-5 Paper Drawer 1 12-10 Paper Drawer 2 12-11 Stack bypass tray 12-8 When the message does not disappear 12-19 [Clear] key 1-6 Collating 4-60 Color Balance 4-54 Deleting 4-59 Recalling 4-58 Registering 4-56 Color Mode 4-7 Common Settings 13-6 Communications Settings 13-8 Control panel 1-3 Left side of control panel 1-10 Main control panel 1-6 Right side of control panel 1-10 Copier Specifications 14-3 Copy Jobs Canceling 4-73 Checking 4-72 Copy Logs Checking 4-74 Custom Copy Ratio 4-33 Customize labels 1-8 Custom key 1 1-7 Custom key 2 1-7 Custom Keys Registering 1-8 D Delayed Sending 5-58 Delivery feeder unit (Electrostatic transfer belt) 1-5 Density Copy 4-19 Fax 5-51 Device Information Checking 1-18 Direct Sending 5-61 Display 1-7 Display parts and functions 1-11 Copy top screen 1-12 Main menu screen 1-11 Select memory media screen 1-14 Send type selection screen 1-13 Duplex unit 1-5 Clearing jams 12-6 E E-mail addresses Registering in One-Touch 3-40 Registering in the Address Book 3-10 Enlarge images (Copy) 4-31 Entering characters 1-19 Erasing addresses from the Address Book 3-30 Erasing One-Touch 3-62 Erasing Shadows/Lines 4-44 Binding Erase 4-44, 4-51 Book Frame Erase 4-44, 4-48 Original Frame Erase 4-44, 4-45 Error codes 12-34 Error indicator 1-6 Error messages 12-24 Ethernet port 1-3 External device jack 1-314-9 Index A ppendix F Facsimile Specifications 14-4 Favorites Erasing 5-67 Registering 5-63 Fax numbers Registering in One-Touch 3-32 Registering in the Address Book 3-2 Feeder 1-3 File server addresses Registering in One-Touch 3-49 Fixing unit 1-5 Forwarding Activating settings 5-135 Checking/changing settings 5-138 Erasing settings 5-136 Printing settings 5-137 Storing settings 5-128 Storing settings without conditions 5-132 Front cover 1-5 G General Specifications 14-2 Group addresses Registering in One-Touch 3-55 Registering in the Address Book 3-24 I I-fax addresses Registering in the Address Book 3-16 ID Card Copy 40 If a Message Such as is displayed 12-41 Changing the Paper Size Setting 12-42 Reloading the paper 12-42 If a Power failure occurs 12-45 If the delivery feeder unit is not installed correctly 12-22 Image Quality Copy 4-35 Fax 5-54 Inserting Memory Media 7-14 Inside of the machine Clearing jams 12-13 Installation requirements xv Installation space xvi Introduction to Using Print Functions 7-4 J Job Recall 5-73 L Loading paper 2-10 In the paper drawer 2-10 In the Stack Bypass Tray 2-16 [Log In/Out] key 1-6 M Machine components External view (back) 1-4 External view (front) 1-2 Internal view 1-5 Machine functions Overview ii Machine Setting 13-2 Printing 13-2 Main power indicator 1-6 Main power switch 1-3 Maintenance Replacing the Toner Cartridges 11-7 When a Message Appears 11-7 Manuals for the machine i Memory Media 7-1214-10 Index A ppendix Mode Memory 4-64 Checking 4-67 Deleting 4-68 Recalling 4-66 Register 4-64 Multiple Copies 4-62 N N on 1 4-37 2 On 1 4-37, 4-38 4 On 1 4-37, 4-38 Numeric keys 1-6 O [OK] key 1-7 One-Touch Checking/editing address details 3-59 Erasing 3-62 Registering e-mail addresses 3-40 Registering fax numbers 3-32 Registering file server addresses 3-49 Registering group addresses 3-55 Online Help 7-6 online help 7-11 Optional cassette Specifications 14-6 Optional Cassette Feeding Unit-AC1 1-3 Clearing jams 12-11 Original output tray 1-3 Originals requirements 2-2 Original stopper 1-3 Original supply tray 1-3 Overview Machine functions ii Overview of Print Functions 7-2 P Paper delivery tray 1-3 Clearing jams 12-5 Paper drawer 1-3 Paper Drawer 1 Clearing jams 12-10 Paper Drawer 2 Clearing jams 12-11 Paper Requirements 2-7 Paper Settings 13-5 Paper Source 4-9 Paper stopper 1-3 PCL 7-4 Placing originals 2-4 In the Feeder 2-5 On the platen glass 2-4 Platen glass 1-5 Power failure 12-45 Power requirements xix Power socket 1-4 Power supply requirements xv [Power] switch (Sub power supply) 1-6, 1-10 Preset Zoom 4-31 Printable Area 2-9 Printer Specifications 14-3 Printer Settings 13-13 Printing Documents from Computer 7-6 Printing from Memory Media 7-15 Printing from Memory Media (Direct Print) 7-12 Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 7-10 Printing USER DATA LIST 13-2 Processing/Data indicator 1-6 PS 7-414-11 Index A ppendix R Receive mode Answer 5-7 Auto RX 5-5 DRPD 5-9 Fax/Tel Auto Switch 5-6 Manual RX 5-8 Recycling cartridge 11-13 U.S.A. PROGRAM 11-14 Reduce images (Copy) 4-31 Removing Memory Media 7-15 Report Settings 13-20 [Reset] key 1-7 Resolution 5-50 S Scaling Documents 7-8 Scanning Area 2-3 Copy 2-3 Fax 2-3 Scanning area 1-5 Scroll wheel 1-7 SD/MS card slot 1-10 Send Specifications 14-5 Setting Menu Address Book Settings 13-10 Adjustment/Cleaning 13-19 Common Settings 13-6 Communication Settings 13-8 PAPER SETTINGS 13-5 Printer Settings 13-13 Report Settings 13-20 System Management Set. 13-21 Timer Settings 13-18 Volume Settings 13-6 Setting paper size and type 2-22 For the paper drawer 2-28 For the stack bypass tray 2-22 Sharpness Copy 4-42 Fax 5-92 Slide guides 1-3 Slide guides for stack bypass tray 1-3 Specifications 14-2 Copier 14-3 Facsimile 14-4 General 14-2 Optional cassette 14-6 Printer 14-3 Send 14-5 Telephone 14-4 Stack bypass tray 1-3 Clearing jams 12-8 Recalling irregular paper size 4-17 Registering irregular paper size 2-26 Stack bypass tray extension 1-3 Standard Mode Changing 4-69 Initializing 4-71 Standard send settings Restoring to default setting 5-87 Storing 5-85 [Start] key 1-6 [Status Monitor/Cancel] key 1-7 [Stop] key 1-614-12 Index A ppendix Storing/editing Address Book 3-2 Checking/editing address details 3-27 Erasing addresses from the Address Book 3-30 Registering e-mail addresses in the Address Book 3-10 Registering fax numbers in the Address Book 3-2 Registering file server addresses in the Address Book 3-18 Registering group addresses in the Address Book 3-24 Registering I-fax addresses in the Address Book 3-16 Storing/editing One-Touch 3-32 Checking/editing address details 3-59 Erasing One-Touch 3-62 Registering e-mail addresses in One-Touch 3-40 Registering fax numbers in One-Touch 3-32 Registering file server addresses in One- Touch 3-49 Registering group addresses in One-Touch 3-55 Registering I-fax addresses in One-Touch 3-46 System Management Set. 13-21 T Telephone Specifications 14-4 Telephone line jack 1-3 Telephone Line Setting 1-20 Timer Settings 1-22, 13-18 Setting Auto Clear Time 1-23 Setting the daylight saving time 1-24 Setting the sleep mode 1-22 Toner Cartridges 1-5, 1-15 Checking the toner level 1-17 Maintaining 1-16 Replacing 11-8 Transporting the Machine 11-19 U UFRII LT 7-4 USB port 1-3 USB Slot 1-10 V Volume Control Dial 1-6, 1-10 Volume Settings 13-6 W When the message does not disappear Clearing jams 12-19CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC. 16-6, Konan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan CANON U.S.A., INC. One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A. CANON EUROPA N.V. Bovenkerkerweg, 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands CANON CHINA CO. LTD. 15F Jinbao Building No.89, Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, PRC CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD 1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632 CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD 1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney NSW 2113, Australia CANON GLOBAL WORLDWIDE SITES http://www.canon.com/ FT5-3332 (000) xxxxxxxxxx

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Color imageCLASS Canon works, you can view and download the Canon Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn Basic Operation Guide on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Basic Operation Guide for Canon Color imageCLASS as well as other Canon manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Basic Operation Guide should include all the details that are needed to use a Canon Color imageCLASS. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Canon Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn Basic Operation Guide is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Canon Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn Basic Operation Guide consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Canon Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn Basic Operation Guide free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Canon Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn Basic Operation Guide, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Canon Color imageCLASS MF9220Cdn Basic Operation Guide as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.